

I 






i 

i 


f 



BREAKFAST WAS PRESENTLY UNDER WAY. 


The Banner Boy Scouts Alloat 


Paee 114 



The Banner Boy 
Scouts Afloat 

OR 

The Secret of Cedar Island 

, \ 

By GEORGE A. WARREN 

«• 

AUTHOR OF "THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS.” "THE 
MUSKET BOYS OF OLD BOSTON.” ETC. 

ILLUSTRATED 



THE WORLD SYNDICATE PUBLISHING CO. 

CLEVELAND, O. NEW YORK, N. Y. 




Copyright, 1913 

by 

CUPPLES & LEON COMPANY 


Trans from 
Leg Ref 
Qot.28,1841 


Printed in the United States of America 
by 

THE COMMERCIAL BOOKBINDING CO* 
CLEVELAND, O. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER page 

I The Mysterious Boxes i 

II Glorious News 12 

III For Cedar Island — Ghost or No Ghost 23 

IV Laying in the Stores 34 

V Just After the Clock Struck Ten 45 

VI The Great Cruise of the Scouts Begun 55 

VII Stuck Fast in the Mud 65 

VIII What the Water Gauge Showed 76 

IX On the Swift Radway 86 

' X Dodging the Snags and the Snares 94 

'XI The Camp on Cedar Island 102 

XII Was it a Bursting Meteor? no 

XIII The Footprints in the Sand 118 

XIV Trying to Figure it all Out 127 

XV Ordered Off 138 

XVI Under Cover of Darkness 151 

XVII Pitching Tents in the “Sink” 162 

XVIII What Lay in the Brush 171 

XIX Laying Plans 1/9 

XX The Exploring Party 188 

XXI A Mystery of the Open Glade 197 

XXII The Wigwag Message 205 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

XXIII Still Floundering in the Mire 214 

XXIV The Discovery 224 

XXV Time to Go Back 234 

XXVI Honorable Scars 244 

XXVII Another Threatening Peril 252 

XXVIII Prepared for the Worst 260 

XXIX Lifting the Lid 269 

XXX Good-bye to Cedar Island 278 

XXXI A Scout's Duty 285 

XXXII Conclusion 296 


PREFACE 


Dear Boys : — 

It is with the greatest pleasure that I present 
you with the third volume of the “Banner Boy 
Scouts Series.” This is a complete story in itself; 
and yet most of the leading characters you, who 
have already read the first and second volumes, 
will easily remember. I trust you will heartily 
welcome the appearance once more on the stage 
of Paul, Jack, Bobolink and all the other good 
fellows belonging to Stanhope Troop of Boy 
Scouts. 

Those of you who are old friends will recol- 
lect that while the Red Fox Patrol was forming, 
the boys had a most strenuous time, what with 
a deep mystery in their midst, and the bitter 
strife resulting from their competition with rival 
troops belonging to neighboring towns. How the 
beautiful banner was cleverly won by Stanhope, 
I related in the first volume, called : “ The Ban- 
ner Boy Scouts.” 

In the succeeding story the Stanhope Scouts 
went on their first long hike, to camp in the open. 


PREFACE 


The remarkable adventures they met with while 
enjoying this experience; as well as the stirring 
account of how they recovered a box of valuable 
papers that had been stolen from the office of 
Joe Clausin’s father, form the main theme of 
“The Banner Boy Scouts on a Tour.” 

And now, in this third book, I have endeav- 
ored to interest you in another series of hap- 
penings that befell these wide-awake boys before 
their summer vacation was over. I hope you 
will, after reading this story through to the last 
line, agree with me that what the young assist- 
ant scout master, Paul Morrison, and his chums 
of Stanhope Troop endured while afloat all went 
to make them better and truer scouts in every 
sense of the word. 

Cordially yours 

George A. Warren. 


THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS 
AFLOAT 


CHAPTER I 

THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES 

“What are you limping for, Bobolink?” 

“Oh I shucks I I see there’s no use trying to 
hide anything from your sharp eyes, Jack Storm- 
ways. Guess I just about walked my feet off to- 
day, goin’ fishin’ with our patrol leader, away 
over to the Radway River, and about six miles 
up.” 

“Have any luck. Bobolink?” instantly de- 
manded the third member of the group of three 
half-grown boys, who were passing after night- 
fall through some of the partly deserted streets 
on the outskirts of the thriving town of Stanhope; 
and whose nam^ it might be stated was Tom 
Betts. 

“Well, I should say, yes. Between us we got 
seven fine bass, and a pickerel. By the way, I 


2 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

caught that pickerel; Paul, he looked after the 
bass end of the string, and like the bully chap 
he is divided with me;’* and the boy who limped 
chuckled as he said this, showing that he could 
appreciate a joke, even when it was on himself. 

About everybody in town called him Bobolink; 
and what boy could do otherwise, seeing that his 
real name was Robert O. Link? 

As the trio of lads were all dressed in the khaki 
suits known all over the world nowadays as typi- 
fying Boy Scouts, it could be readily taken for 
granted that they belonged to the Stanhope 
Troop. 

Already were there three full patrols enlisted, 
and wearing uniforms; while a fourth was in 
process of forming. The ones already in the 
field were known as, first, the Red Fox, to which 
these three lads belonged; then the Gray Fox, and 
finally the Black Fox. But as they had about ex- 
hausted the color roster of the fox family, the 
chances were that the next patrol would have 
to start on a new line when casting about for 
a name that would stamp their identity, and 
serve as a totem. 

An efficient scout master had been secured in 
the person of a young man by the name of Mr. 
Gordon, who cheerfully accompanied the lads on 
their outings, and attended many of their meet- 
ings. But being a traveling salesman, Mr. Gor- 


THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES 


3 


don often had to be away from home for weeks 
at a time. 

When these lapses occurred, his duties fell 
upon the shoulders of Paul Morrison, who not 
only filled the position of leader to the Red Fox 
Patrol, but being a first-class scout, had received 
his commission from; Headquarters that entitled 
him to act as assistant scout master to the whole 
troop during the absence of Mr. Gordon. 

“ How did you like it up on the Radway? ” con- 
tinued the one who had made the first inquiry, 
Jack Stormways, whose father owned a lumber 
yard and planing mill just outside the limits of 
the town, which was really the goal of their 
present after-supper walk. 

“ Great place, all right,” replied Bobolink. 
“ Paul kept calling my attention to all the things 
worth seeing. He seems to think a heap of the 
old Radway. For my part, I rather fancy our 
own tight little river, the Bushkill.” 

“Well, d’ye know, that’s one reason I asked 
how you liked it,” Jack went on. “ Paul seemed 
so much taken with that region over there. I’ve 
begun to get a notion in my head he’s fixing a big 
surprise, and that perhaps at the meeting to- 
night he may spring it on us.” 

“Tell me about that, will you?” exclaimed 
Bobolink, who was given to certain harmless 
slang ways whenever he became in the least ex- 


4 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


cited, as at present. “ Now that you’ve been and 
gone and given me a pointer, I c’n just begin to 
get a line on a few of the questions he asked me. 
Well, Fm willing to leave it to Paul. He always 
thinks of the whole shooting match when trying 
to give the troop a bully good time. Just remem- 
ber what we went through with when we camped 
out up on Rattlesnake Mountain, will you ? ” 

“That’s right,” declared Tom Betts, eagerly; 
“ say, didn’t we have the time of our lives, 
though ? ” 

“ And yet Paul said only today that as we had 
so long a time before vacation ends this year, a 
chance might pop up for another trip,” Bobolink 
remarked, significantly. 

“ Did, eh? ” Well, don’t that go to prove what 
I said; and you just wait till we get back to the 
meeting room in the church. Paul’s just bursting 
with some sort of secret, and I reckon he’ll just 
have to tell us to-night,” and Jack laughed good- 
naturedly as he still led his two comrades on to- 
ward the retired lane, where his father’s big mill 
adjoined the storage place for lumber; con- 
venient to the river, and at the same time near 
the railroad, so that a spur track could enter the 
yard. 

Besides these three boys five others constituted 
the Red Fox Patrol of Stanhope Troop. In the 
first story of this series, which appeared under 


THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES 


5 


the name of “The Banner Boy Scouts; Or, The 
Struggle for Leadership,” the reader was told 
about the formation of the Red Fox Patrol, and 
how some of the boys learned a lesson in scout 
methods of returning good for evil; also how 
a cross old farmer was taught that he owed a 
duty to the community in which he lived, as well 
as to himself. In that story it was also disclosed 
how a resident of the town offered a beautiful 
banner to that troop which excelled in an open 
tournament also participated in by two other 
troops of Boy Scouts from the towns of Aldine 
and Manchester; the former on the east bank of 
the Bushkill, about six miles up-stream, and the 
latter a bustling manufacturing place about seven 
miles down, and also on the same bank as Aldine. 

In this competition, after a lively duel between 
the three wideawake troops. Stanhope won hand- 
somely; and had therefore been given the banner, 
which Wallace Carberry proudly carried at the 
head of the procession whenever they paraded. 

The second book, “The Banner Boy Scouts 
-on a Tour; Or, The Mystery of Rattlesnake 
Mountain,” was given over almost exclusively to 
descriptions of the wonderful things that came to 
pass when Stanhope Troop spent a part of their 
vacation camping out in order that those who 
were backward in their knowledge of hov^ take 
care of themselves when in the open should have 


6 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


a good chance to learn many of the secrets of 
Nature. 

So many strange things happened to the boys 
when up on Rattlesnake Mountain that it would 
be utterly impossible to even mention them here; 
but if you wish to know all about the mystery 
they solved, and the numerous other exciting 
events that befell them, you must get the second 
volume. 

There was to be a special meeting, which the 
acting scout master had called for this evening; 
and Bobolink, Jack, and Tom Betts expected to 
be back from their errand in time to answer to 
their names when the roll was called. 

It was only to oblige Jack that the other two 
had left home half an hour earlier than was really 
necessary. Jack had asked them, over the tele- 
phone, to drop around, as he had to go out to his 
father’s mill before he could attend the meeting 
in the church, where a room in the basement had 
been kindly loaned to them by the trustees. 

“ What’s all this mean about you going to the 
mill at this queer old hour?” Bobolink was say- 
ing, as the three boys continued to walk on 
abreast, the speaker carrying the silver-plated 
bugle which he knew how to manipulate so well 
when the occasion allowed its use. 

“Why, you see it’s this way,” Jack went on to 
explain. “ My father knows a man of the name 


THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES 


7 


of Professor Hackett, though what he’s a pro- 
fessor of you needn’t ask me, because I don’t 
know. But he’s a bright little gentleman, all 
right; and somehow or other he looks like he’s 
just cram full of some secret that’s trying to break 
out all over him.” 

Bobolink laughed aloud. 

“Well, that’s a funny description you give of 
the gentleman, I must say. Jack; but go on — 
what’s he got to do with our making this trip 
to the big mill tonight?” 

“ I just guess it’s got everything to do with it,” 
replied the other. “You see, the professor had 
a number of big cases sent up here on the train, 
and they came today, and were taken to the mill ; 
for my father promised to keep them there a 
couple of days until the owner could take them 
away. What under the sun’s in those big boxes 
I couldn’t tell you from Adam ; all I know is that 
he seems to be mighty much afraid somebody’s 
going to steal them.” 

“Wow I and are we going there to stand 
guard over the blooming old things?” exclaimed 
Bobolink in dismay; for he would not want to 
miss that special meeting for anything. 

“ Oh I not quite so bad as that,” answered Jack, 
with a laugh. “ But you see, that professor 
wrote my father that he wanted him to hire a 
trusty man who would stay in the mill over night 


8 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


until he could get up here from New York and 
take the boxes away, somewhere or other. 

“ Oh, that’s it, eh ? And where do we find the 
guardian of the treasure? Is he going to bob up 
on the road to the mill? ” Tom Betts demanded. 

“ He promised father to be on deck at seven- 
thirty, and it’ll be close on that by the time we 
get there, I reckon,” Jack continued. 

“And what have you got to do about it?” 
asked Bobolink. 

“ Let him in, and lock the door after he’s on 
duty,” replied Jack, promptly. “You see, ever 
since that attempt was made to burn the mill, 
when those hoboes, or yeggs, thought they’d find 
money in the safe, and had their trouble for their 
pains, my father has been mighty careful how 
he leaves the office unfastened. He couldn’t see 
this man, Hans Waggoner, who used to work 
for us, but talked with him over the ’phone, and 
told him I’d be there to meet him, and let him in. 
That’s all there is to it, boys, believe me.” 

“ Only, you don’t know what’s in those boxes, 
and you’d give a cookie to find out?” suggested 
Bobolink. 

“It isn’t so bad as that,” replied the other. 
“ Of course I’m a little curious about what they 
might hold, that they have to be specially guard- 
ed; but I guess it’s none of my business, and I’m 
not going to monkey around, trying to find out.” 


THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES 


9 


“Say, d’ye suppose your dad knows?” asked 
Tom. 

“Sure he must,” came from Jack, instantly. 
“ He’d be silly to let anybody store a lot of cases 
that might hold dynamite, or any other old ex- 
plosive, in his planing mill, without knowing all 
about ’em; wouldn’t he? But my father don’t 
think it’s any of my affair, you see. And besides, 
I wouldn’t be surprised if that funny little profes- 
sor had bound him not to tell anybody about it. 
They got the boxes in on the sly, and that’s a 
fact, boys.” 

“ Oh ! splash ! now you’ve got me worked up 
with guessing, and I’ll never be able to sleep till 
I know all about it,” grumbled Bobolink. 

“ You’re just as curious as any old woman I 
ever heard of,” declared Jack. 

“He always was,” said Tom Betts, with a 
chuckle, “ and I could string off more’n a few 
times when that same curiosity hauled Bobolink 
into a peck of trouble. But p’raps your father 
might let out the secret to you, after the old 
boxes have been taken away, and then you can 
ease his mind. Because it’s just like he says, and 
he’ll keep on dreamin’ the most wonderful things 
about those cases you ever heard tell about. That 
imagination of Bobolink is something awful.” 

“ Huh I ” grunted the one under discussion, 
“ not much worse than some others I know about 


10 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


right now; only they c’n keep a tight grip on 
theirs, and Fm that simple I just have to blurt 
everything out. Both of you fellers’d like to 
know nearly as much as I v/ould, what that mys- 
terious little old man has got hid away in those 
big cases. Of course you would. But you jump 
on the lid, and hold it down. It gets away with 
me; that’s all.” 

“All the same, it’s mighty good of you fel- 
lows, coming all the way out here with me to- 
night; and even when Bobolink’s got a stone 
bruise on his heel, or something like that,” Jack 
went on to say, with a vein of sincere affection 
in his voice; for the boys making up the Red Fox 
Patrol of Stanhope Troop were very fond of each 
other. 

“ Oh I rats I what’s the good of being a scout 
if you can’t do a comrade a little favor once in a 
while?” asked Bobolink, impetuously. “But 
there’s the mill looming up ahead. Jack, in the 
dark. Half a moon don’t give a whole lot of 
light, now, does it; and especially when it’s a 
cloudy night in the bargain? ” 

“ Well, I declare I ” exclaimed Jack. 

“ What is it; did you see anything? ” demanded 
Tom Betts, hastily. 

“ I’m not dead sure,” admitted Jack; “you see, 
just as Bobolink said, the light’s mighty poor, 
and a fellow could easily be mistaken; but I 


THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES 


II 


thought I saw something that looked like a tall 
man scuttle away around that corner of the mill, 
and dodge behind that pile of lumber! ” 

“Whew!” ejaculated Bobolink, showing the 
utm'ost interest, for excitement appealed to him. 

“ Say, perhaps Hans has arrived ahead of the 
half hour,” suggested Tom Betts. 

“ No, it wasn’t Hans, because I know him well, 
and he’s a Jittle runt of a Dutchman, but a 
fighter from the word go; and my father knows 
nobody’s going to get away with those boxes 
of the professor while Hans and his musket, 
that was used in the Civil War, are on guard. 
That was a tall man, and he ran like he’d just 
heard us coming, and wanted to hide. I guess 
somebody else is curious about those boxes, be- 
sides Bobolink.” 


CHAPTER II 

GLORIOUS NEWS 

“Look! there he goes scooting away over 
past that other pile of lumber! ” said Tom Betts, 
pointing as he spoke; and both the others caught 
a glimpse of a dim figure that was bending over 
while hurrying away, as if anxious not to be 
seen. 

“ Well, what d’ye think of the nerve of that? ” 
ejaculated Bobolink, making a move as though 
in his impetuous way he was soreily tempted to 
chase after the disappearing figure of the un- 
known; only that the more cautious Jack threw 
out a hand, and caught hold of his sleeve. 

“ Never mind him, boys,” remarked the son of 
the lumber man. “ Perhaps it was only a tramp 
from the railroad, after all, meaning to find a 
place to sleep among the lumber piles. But I’m 
going to tell my father about it, all the same. 
Seems to me he ought to have some one like 
Hans stay here every night. Some of those ho- 
boes will set fire to things, either by accident, or 
because they are mad at the town for not hand- 
12 


GLORIOUS NEWS 


13 


ing enough good things out to suit their appe- 
tites.” 

They walked on, and in another minute were 
at the office door. There they sat down on the 
stoop to rest and talk; but only a few minutes 
had passed when they heard the sound of ap- 
proaching footsteps; and a small but very erect 
figure appeared, carrying an old-fashioned mus- 
ket of the vintage of ’61 over his shoulder. 

“ Hello ! Hans, on time all right, I see I ” called 
out Jack. 

“ Dot is me, I dells you, every time. I am 
punctuality idself. I sets me der clock, undt fig- 
ure dot all oudt, s-o I haf yust der time to valk 
here. Der sooner you obens der door, Misder 
Jack, der sooner I pe on der chob,” was the re- 
ply of the little man who had been hired to 
watch the mill, and those strange boxes, during 
the night. 

Evidently Hans was “strictly business.” He 
had been hired to watch, and he wanted to be 
earning his wages as quickly as possible. 

So Jack used his key, and the four entered 
the office. It was quite a good-sized room. The 
windows were covered with heavy wire netting, 
and it seemed strong enough to resist any ordi- 
nary degree of force. After that attempt to rob 
his safe, Mr. Stormways had taken precautions 
against a similar raid. 


14 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

The watchman also carried a lantern, which 
he now lighted. No sooner had this been done 
than Bobolink uttered an exclamation. 

“I reckon now, Jack, that these three big boxes 
are the ones the professor wants watched?” he 
observed, pointing as he spoke to several cum- 
bersome cases that stood in a group, occupying 
considerable space. 

Tom Betts, also looking, saw that they were 
unusually well fastened. In addition to the ordi- 
nary nailing, they were bound along the edges 
with heavy twisted wire, through which frequent 
nails had been driven. When they came to be 
opened, the job would prove no easy one. 

“Yes, those are the ones; and Hans is to 
spend most all his time right here in the office,” 
Jack went on to say. “ I’m going to ask my 
father if he ought not to hire you to be night 
watchman right along, Hans. This plant of ours 
is getting too big a thing to leave unguarded, with 
so many tramps coming along the road in the 
good old summer time. I suppose you’d like the 
job, all right?” 

“Sure,” replied the bustling little man, his 
eyes sparkling. “ I always did enchoy vorkin’ for 
Misder Stormways. Undt it habbens dot yust 
now I am oudt off a chob. Dot vill pe allright. 
I hopes me idt turns out so. Undt now, off you 


GLORIOUS NEWS 


15 


like, you could lock der door some. I stay me 
here till somepody gomes der mornin’ py.” 

“Oh! you keep the key, Hans,” replied Jack. 
“You might want to chase out after some one; 
but father told me to warn you not to be tempted 
to go far away. You see, he’s storing these cases 
for a friend, and it seems that somebody wants 
to either get at ’em, or steal them. They’re what 
you’re hired to protect, Hans. And now let us 
out, and lock the door after we’re gone.” 

Anxious to get to the church before the meet- 
ing could be called to order, the three scouts did 
not linger, although Hans was such an amusing 
little man that they would have liked nothing 
better than to spend an hour in his society, listen- 
ing to stories about his adventures — for the 
Dutchman had roamed pretty much all over the 
world since his boyhood. 

“Shucks! I forgot to examine those boxes,” 
lamented Bobolink, when they were on the way 
past the end of the lumber yard. 

Jack was glancing sharply about, wondering 
whether that tall, skulking figure they had 
glimpsed could be some one who had a peculiar 
interest in the boxes stored in the office of the 
mill until Professor Hackett called for them; or 
just an ordinary “Weary Willie,” looking for a 
soft board to sleep on, before he continued his 
hike along the railroad track. 


i6 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


But look as he would, he could see no further 
sign of a trespasser. Of course that was no sign 
the unknown might not be within twenty feet of 
them, right then. The tall piles of lumber of- 
fered splendid hiding-places if any one was dis- 
posed to take advantages of the nooks; Jack had 
explored many a snug hole, wTien roaming 
through the yard at various times, and ought to 
know about it. 

“Oh! I took care of that part,” chuckled Tom 
Betts. “ I saw you were talking with Jack and 
old Hans, so I just stepped up, and walked 
around the boxes. There isn’t a thing on ’em 
but the name of the professor, and Jack’s dad’s 
address in Stanhope.” 

“And they didn’t look much like animal cages 
to me,” muttered Bobolink; upon which both of 
the others emitted exclamations of surprise, 
whereupon the speaker seemed to think he ought 
to make some sort of explanation, so he went on 
hastily: “You see. Jack, I somehow got a silly 
idea in my mind that p’raps this little professor 
was some sort of an animal trainer, and meant 
to come up here, just to have things quiet while 
he did his little stunts. But that was a punk no- 
tion for me, all right; there ain’t any smell of ani- 
mals about those boxes, not a whiff.” 

“ But what in the wide world gave you that 
queer notion?” asked Tom. 


GLORIOUS NEWS 


17 


“ Don’t know,” replied Bobolink, “’less it was 
what Jack said about the professor writing up 
from Coney Island near New York City; that’s 
the place where all the freaks show every sum- 
mer. I’ve been down there myself.” 

“ Listen to him, would you. Jack, owning up 
that he’s a sure enough freak? Well, some of us 
had a little idea that way. Bobolink, but we never 
thought you’d admit it so coolly,” remarked Tom 
Betts, laughingly. 

“ And the wild animal show down there is just 
immense,” the other went on, not heeding the 
slur cast upon his reputation; for like many boys. 
Bobolink had a pretty tough skin, and was not 
easily offended ; “ and I guess I’ve thought about 
what I saw done there heaps of times. So Coney 
stands for wild animal trainin’ to me. But that 
guess was away wide of the mark. Forget it, 
fellows. Only whenever Jack here learns what 
was in those boxes, he must let his chums know. 
It’s little enough to pay for draggin’ a lame 
scout all the way out here tonight; think so. 
Jack?” 

“ I sure do, and you’ll have it, if ever I find 
out,” was the reply. “Perhaps, after they’ve 
been taken away by the professor, my father 
mightn’t mind telling me what was in them. And 
we’ll let it rest at that, now.” 


i8 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


** But you mark me, if Bobolink gets any peace 
of mind till he learns,” warned Tom. 

Chatting on various matters connected more or 
less with the doings of the Boy Scout movement, 
and what a fine thing it was proving for the 
youth of the whole land. Jack and his chums 
presently brought up at the church which had 
the bell tower; and where a splendid meeting 
room had been given over for their occupancy in 
the basement, in which a gymnasium was fitted 
up for use in the fall and winter. 

In that tower hung a big bell, whose brazen 
tongue had once upon a time alarmed the good 
people of Stanhope by ding-donging at a most 
unusual hour. It had come through a prank 
played upon the scouts by several tough boys of 
the town whose enmity Paul Morrison and his 
chums had been unfortunate enough to incur. But 
for the details of that exciting episode the reader 
will have to be referred back to the preceding 
volume. 

Jack Stormways never glanced up at that tow- 
er but that he was forcibly reminded of that 
startling adventure; and a smile would creep over 
his face as he remembered some of the most 
striking features connected with the event. 

In the big room the three scouts found quite a 
crowd awaiting their coming. Indeed, it seemed 
as though nearly every member of the troop had 


GLORIOUS NEWS 


19 


made it an especial point to attend this meeting 
just as though they knew there was something 
unusual about to come before them for considera- 
tion. 

As many of these lads will be apt to figure in 
the pages of this story, it might be just as well 
to listen to the secretary, as he calls the ros- 
ter of the Stanhope Troop. Once this duty had 
devolved upon one of the original Red Fox Pa- 
trol; but with the idea of sharing the responsi- 
bilities in a more general way, it had been trans- 
ferred to the shoulders of Phil Towns, who be- 
longed to the second patrol. 

RED FOX PATROL 

1 — Paul Morrison, patrol leader, and also as- 
sistant scout master. 

2 — ^Jack Stomiways. 

3 — Bobolink, the official bugler. 

4 — Bluff Shipley, the drummer. 

5 — Nuthin, whose real name was Albert Cy- 
pher. 

6 — ^William Carberry, one of the twins. 

7 — Wallace Carberry, the other. 

8 — ^Tom Betts. 


20 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


GRAY FOX PATROL 

1 — ^Jucl Elderkin, patrol leader. 

2 — Joe Clausin. 

3 — Andy Flinn. 

4 — Phil Towns. 

5 — Horace Poole. 

6 — Bob Tice. 

7 — Curly Baxter. 

8 — Cliff Jones, whose entire name was Clifford 
Ellsworth Fairfax Jones. 

BLACK FOX PATROL 

1 — Frank Savage, patrol leader. 

2 — Billie Little, a very tall lad, and of course 
always called Little Billie. 

3 — Nat Smith. 

4 — Sandy Griggs. 

5 — Old Dan Tucker. 

6_“ Red ” Conklin. 

7 — “ Spider ” Sexton. 

8 — “ Gusty ” Bellows. 

Unattached, but to belong to a fourth patrol, 
later on: 


George Hurst. 

“ Lub ” Ketcham, 


GLORIOUS NEWS 


21 


Thus it will be seen that there were now twen- 
ty-six lads connected with the wideawake Stan- 
hope Troop, and more coming. 

After the roll call, they proceeded to the regu- 
lar business, with Paul Morrison in the chair, he 
being the president of the association. It was 
surprising how well many of these boyish meet- 
ings were conducted; Paul and some of his com- 
rades knew considerable about parliamenta^ry 
law, and long ago the hilarious members of the 
troop had learned that when once the meeting 
was called to order they must put all joking 
aside. 

Many a good debate had been heard within 
those same wails since the scouts received permis- 
sion to meet there; and yet in camp, when the 
rigid discipline was relaxed, these same fellows 
could be as Ml of fun and frolic as any lads 
going. 

Tonight it 'had been whispered around that 
Paul had some sort of important 'Communica- 
tion to make. No one could give a guess as 
to what it might be, although all sorts of haz- 
ards were attempted, only to be jeered at as ab- 
surd. 

And so, while the meeting progressed, they 
were growing more and more excited, until finally 
it was as much as some of them could do to re- 
press a cheer when Paul, having made sure that 


22 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


there was no other business to be transacted, 
arose with a smile, and announced that he had a 
certain communication to lay before them. 

“ Are you ready to hear it? ” he asked; “ every 
fdlow who is raise his hand.” 

Needless to say, not a single hand remained 
unraised. Paul deliberately counted them to the 
bitter end. 

“ Just twenty-four; and as that is the total num- 
ber present, we’ll call it unanimous,” he said, just 
to tantalize them a little; and then, with an air 
of business he went on: “Two splendid gentle- 
men of this town, by name Mr. Everett and Col- 
onel Bliss, happen to own motorboats. As they 
have gone to Europe, to be away until late in the 
Fall, they thought it wculd show how they ap- 
preciated the work of the Stanhope Troop of 
Boy Scouts if they offered the free use of their 
two boats to us, to make a cruise wherever we 
thought best during the balance of vacation time. 
Now, all in favor of accepting this magnificent 
offer from our fellow townsmen signify by say- 
ing ‘ aye ! ’ ” 

Hardly had the words fallen from the speak- 
er’s lips when a thunderous “ aye ” made the 
stout walls of the building tremble. 


CHAPTER III 


FOR CEDAR ISLAND GHOST OR NO GHOST 

“Three cheers for Colonel Bliss and Mr. Ev- 
erett I ” called out Bobolink, almost too excited to 
speak plainly. 

Paul himself led the cheering, because he knew 
iJiose delighted boys just had to find some sort of 
outlet for the enthusiasm that was bubbling up 
within them. And doubtless the walls of that 
sacred building had seldom heard such cheers 
since away back in the time when a meeting was 
held there at news of the Civil War breaking 
out in i86i and the patriotic citizens had formed 
a company on the spot, to volunteer their services 
to the President. 

“ Where will we go ? ” palled out one scout, 
after the cheering had died down, and they found 
time to consider ways and means of employing 
the motorboats that had been so generously given 
into their keeping. 

“ Down the BushkiH to the sea ! ” suggested 
one. 

“ I suppose you think these motorboats can 
23 


24 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


jump like broncos? ’’ declared Jud Elderkin, with 
a look of disgust; “ else how would they ever get 
around that big dam down at Seely’s Mills? We 
could crawl a few miles up the Bushkill, but to go 
down would mean only a short cruise.” 

“Let Paul say!” cried Bobolink, shrewdly 
reading the smile on the face of the assistant 
scout master, as he listened to all sorts of wild 
plans, none of which would hold together when 
the rest of the scouts started to pick flaws. 

“Yes, Paul’s got a scheme that’ll knock all 
these wildcat ones just to flinders, see if it don’t,” 
remarked Tom Betts, waving his hands to en- 
force silence. 

“ Go on and tell us, Paul ; and I reckon I c’n 
give a right smart guess that it’s about that Rad- 
way River country,” declared Bobolink. 

“Just what it is,” said Paul. “Listen, then, 
and tell me what you think of my plan. Pve fig- 
ured it all out, and believe we could make it a 
go. If we did, we’d surely have the time of our 
lives, and find out something that I’ve wanted my- 
self to know a long whide back. It’s about a trip 
up the Radway River, too, just as our smart chum 
guessed.” 

“ But, say, the boats are right here at Stan- 
hope, and have been used in running up and down 
the Bushkill ; then how in the name of wonder can 
we carry them over to the Radway, which is some 


FOR CEDAR ISLAND 


25 


miles away, I take it?” asked William Carberry, 
soberly. 

“\¥ait and see; Paul’s got all that arranged,” 
declared the confident Tom Betts. 

“ Have ’em hauled over on one of his father’s 
big lumber wagons, mebbe,” suggested Nuthin, 
who was rather a small chap, though not of quite 
so little importance as his name would seem to in- 
dicate. 

‘‘Oh, you make me tired, Nuthin,” declared 
Bobolink; “why, those motorboats weigh a ton 
or two apiece. Think of gettin’ a wagon strong 
enough to carry one; and all the slow trips it’d 
have to take to get ’em there and back. I reckon 
the whole of our vacation’d see us on the dry land 
part of the cruise. Now, let Paul tell us what 
pilan he’s been thinking about to get over to the 
Radway with ’em.” 

“Well, it’s just this way,” the chairman of the 
meeting went on to say, calmly, with the air of 
one who had studied the matter carefully, and 
grasped every little detail; “most of you know 
that there was a stream known as Jackson Creek 
that ran Into the Bushkill a mile below Manches- 
ter. That was once dredged out, and made to 
form a regular canal connecting the two rivers. 
For years, my father says. It was used regularly 
by all sorts of boats that wanted to cross over 
from one river to the other. But changes came, 


26 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


and by degrees the old canal has been about for- 
gotten. Still, it’s there; and I went through it in 
my canoe just yesterday, to sound, and see if it 
could be used by the motorboats now.” 

“And could it?” asked Bobolink, eagerly. 

“ I think there’s a fair chance that we’d pull 
through, though it might sometimes be a close 
shave. There’s a lot of nasty mud in the canal, 
because, you see, it hasn’t been cleaned out for 
years. If we had a good rain now, and both riv- 
ers raised, we wouldn’t have any trouble, but 
could run through easy enough.” 

“ Well, supposing we did get through, how far 
up the Radway would we push ? ” asked Bobolink, 
determined to get the entire proposition out of 
Paul at once, now that they had him going. 

“All the way to Lake Tokala,” replied Paul, 
promptly. “ Some of you happen to know that 
there’s a joHy island in that big lake, known as 
Cedar Island, because right on top of a small hill 
in the middle, a splendid cedar stands. Well, we 
could take our tents along, and make camp on 
that island, fishing, swimming, and having one of 
the best times ever heard of. What do you say, 
fellows?” 

Immediately there was a clamor of tongues. 
Some seemed to be for accepting Paul’s sugges- 
tion with a whoop, and declared that it took them 
by storm. A few, however, seemed to raise ob- 


FOR CEDAR ISLAND 


27 


jections; and such was the racket that nobody was 
able to make himself understood. So the chair- 
man called for order; and with the whack of his 
gavel on the table every voice was stilled. 

Let’s conduct this meeting in a parliament- 
ary way,” said Paul. “Some of you must have 
thought it stood adjourned. Now, whoever wants 
to speak, get up, and let’s hear what you’ve got 
to say.” 

“ I move that we take up the plan offered, and 
make our headquarters on Cedar Island,” said 
Wallace Carberry, rising. 

“Not on your life!” declared Curly Baxter, 
bobbing up like a jack-'in-the-hox; “I’ve heard 
lots about that same place. It’s troubled with a 
mystery, and only last week I heard Paddy Reilly 
say he’d never go there fishin’ again if he was 
paid for it He’s dreadfully afraid of ghosts, 
Paddy is.” 

“ Ghosts 1 ” almost shouted William Carberry; 
“ I vote to go to Cedar Island then. I’ve always 
wanted to see a genuine ghost, and never yet had 
a chance.” 

“Now, I heard that it was a wild man that 
lived somewhere on that same island,” remarked 
Frank Savage. “They say he’s a terror, too, all 
covered with hair; and one man who’d been look- 
ing for pearl mussels in the river up that way 
told my father he beat any Wild Man of Bor* 


28 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

neo he’d ever set eyes on in a freak show or cir- 
cus.” 

“ Oh, that’s a fine place for honest scouts to 
pitch their tents, ain’t it — I don’t think I ” ob- 
served Joe Clausin, with a sneer. 

“ H-h-huh I ain’t there j-j-just twenty-six of us 
s-s-scouts; and ought we b-b-be afraid of one 
1-1-little g-g-ghost, or even a w-w-wild man?” de- 
manded Bluff Shipley, who stuttered once in a 
while, when unduly excited, though he was by 
degrees overcoming the nervous habit. 

“ Put it to a vote, Mr. Chairman I ” called out 
Bobolink. 

“Yes, and majority rules, remember,” warned 
William Carberry. 

“ But that don’t mean a feller just has to go 
along, does it?” asked Nuthin, looldng some- 
what aghast at the thought. 

“ Of course it don’t; ” Bobolink told him; “ all 
the same you’ll be on deck, my boy. I just know 
you can’t resist having such a jolly good time, 
ghost or not. Question, Mr. Chairman I” 

“Vote! Vote!” 

“ All in favor of trying to go through the old 
canal that used to connect the Bushkill with the 
Radway, and cruising up to Cedar Island, camp- 
ing there for a week or ten days, say ‘ aye,’ ” Paul 
went on to remark. 

A thunderous response cheered his heart; for 


FOR CEDAR ISLAND 


29 

somehow Paul seemed very much set upon fol- 
lowing out the scheme he himself had devised. 

“ Contrary, no I ” he continued. 

There were just three who boldly allowed 
themselves to be set down as not being in favor 
of the daring plan — Nuthin, Curly Baxter and 
Joe Clausin; and yet, just as the wise, far-seeing 
Bobolink had declared, when it came to a ques- 
tion of staying at home while the rest of the troop 
were off enjoying their vacation, or swallowing 
their fear of ghosts and wild men, these three 
boys would be along when the motorboats started 
on their adventurous cruise. 

“ The ayes have it; and the meeting stands ad- 
journed, according to the motion I can see Jack 
Stormways’s just about to put,” and with a laugh 
Paul stepped down from the platform. 

For fully half an hour they talked the thing 
over. It was viewed from every possible angle. 
Many objections raised by the doubters were 
promptly met by the ready Paul; and in the end 
it was definitely decided that they would give just 
one day to making all needed preparations. 

They had tents for the three {)atrols now, and 
all sorts of cooking utensils; for frequently the 
scouts were divided into messes, there being a 
cook appointed in each patrol. 

What was needed most of all were the sup- 
plies for an extended stay; and when it was taken 


30 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


into consideration that a score of boys, with rave- 
nous appetites, would want three big meals each 
and every day, the question of figuring out 
enough provisions to see them through was no 
light matter. 

But then they had considerable money in the 
treasury, and a numbers of the boys said they 
would bring loaves of bread, and all sorts of eat- 
ables from home; so Paul saw his way clear to- 
ward providing the given quantity. 

“ Don’t forget that the gasoline is going to eat 
a big hole into our little pile of the long green,” 
remarked Curly Baxter, still engaged in trying to 
throw cold water on the scheme. 

‘‘ Oh, that makes me think of something I for- 
got to tell you, fellows,” declared Paul, his face 
filled with good humor. “ One of the stipulations 
connected with the lending of these two motor- 
boats by the kind gentlemen who own them was 
that they insisted on supplying all the liquid fuel 
needed to run the craft. The tanks are to be 
filled, and each boat carries in addition another 
drum, with extra gasoline. We’ll likely have 
enough for all our needs that way, and without 
costing us a red cent, cither. So, you see how 
easy most of your objections melt away. Curly. 
Chances are, you’ll fall into line, and be with us 
when we start the day after tomorrow.” 

Several of the boys were feeling pretty blue. 


FOR CEDAR ISLAND 


31 


They wanted to accompany the rest of the troop 
the worst way; but it happened that their folks 
had planned to go down to the sea-shore for a 
month, until school began again; and the chances 
were they would have to go along, though every 
one of them declared they would choose the cruise 
up the Radway in the two motorboats, if given 
their way. 

But it looked as though there was going to be 
a pretty fair crowd on each boat. Paul counted 
noses of those he believed would be along, and 
found that they seemed to number eighteen. If 
two of the three timid ones concluded to throw 
their fears to the winds, and come along, it would 
make an even twenty. 

“ Of course, it will be hard to sleep so many 
aboard, because the boats are small affairs, taken 
altogether,” Paul observed; “but we hope to 
make the journey in a full day, and be on Cedar 
Island by nightfall.” 

“Whew! night on Cedar Island — excuse me^ 
If you please I ” faltered Curly Baxter, holding 
up both hands, as though the idea suggested all 
sorts of terrible things to his mind; but much as 
he seemed desirous of causing others to back out, 
Paul saw no signs of any one doing so. 

“ Meet here at noon tomorrow, boys, and Fll 
report what IVe done. Then we can figure on 
what else we have to lay in store, so as to be 


32 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


comfortable. We must get everything down to 
the boats before evening, because we start early 
on Wednesday, you hear. At eight A. M., Bobo- 
link, here, will sound his bugle; and ten minutes 
later we weigh anchor, or cut loose our hawsers, 
as you choose to say it, for it means letting go a 
rope after all.” 

They started home in bunches, as usual, those 
who happened to live near together naturally 
waiting for each other. Paul, Jack and Bobo- 
link walked together. 

“And just as it happens so many times,” Paul 
was saying, as they sauntered on in the direction 
of home, “ Mr. Gordon is away on the road 
somewhere, selling goods ; so we have to go with- 
out having our fine scoutmaster along to look 
after us.” 

“ Guess nobody will miss him very much, al- 
though Mr. Gordon is a mighty nice man and 
we all think a heap of him; but you are able to 
fill his shoes all right, Paul; and, somehow, it 
seems to feel better not to have any grown-up 
along. The responsibility makes most of the fel- 
lers behave, and think for themselves, you see,” 
Jack went on to say. 

Paul heaved a little sigh, for he knew who 
shouldered most of that same responsibility. 

“ But,” remarked Bobolink, as he was about to 
separate from Jack and Paul on a certain corner, 


FOR CEDAR ISLAND 


33 


where their ways divided; “ Fd give something 
right now to just know what’s in those queer old 
boxes Professor Hackett has stored in your mill, 
Jack; and why they have to be watched, just like 
they held money or something that has to be 
guarded against an unknown enemy I But I 
guess ril have to take it out in wantin’, because 
you don’t know, and wouldn’t tell till you got the 
consent of your dad, even if you did. Goodnight, 
fellows; and here’s hoping we’re going to have 
the time of our lives up and around Cedar Is- 
land!” 


CHAPTER IV 


LAYING IN THE STORES 

Well, it was a busy day for the scouts of 
Stanhope Troop. 

There was the greatest running back and forth, 
and consultations among the lads, ever known. 
Where a parent seemed doubtful about giving per- 
mission for a boy to take part in the intended 
cruise, influence was brought to bear on coaxing 
neighbors to drop in, and tell how glad they were 
their boys were independent, as it was the finest 
thing that could ever come to them; and also 
what slight chances there seemed to be of any 
accident happening that might not occur when 
the lads stayed at home, where they would go 
in swimming anyhow. 

And owing to the masterly way in which the 
objections of certain parents were met and over- 
come, long before noon every boy who had a 
ghost of a chance of sailing on the two motor- 
boats reported that he had gained consent; even 
Curly Baxter admitted that his folks had been 
34 


LAYING IN THE STORES 


35 


won over, and that he “could go along, if so be 
he chose to shut his eyes to facts, and just trust 
to luck,” which, be it said, he finally did, just as 
Paul had believed would be the case. 

Meanwhile Paul and Jack were making their 
purchases of provisions, using a list that had 
been found useful on their other camping trip; 
although several little inaccuracies were correct- 
ed. For instance, they had taken too much rice 
on that other occasion; and not enough ham, and 
salt pork, and breakfast bacon. 

Eggs they hoped to buy from some farmer 
over on the mainland; -and possibly milk as well. 
Jack even hinted that they might feel disposed, 
if the money held out, to get a few chickens, and 
have one grand feed before breaking camp. 

“And this time we’ll try and make sure that 
none of our grub is hooked, like it was when 
we camped up on old Rattlesnake Mountain,” 
Jack had declared, with emphasis, for the mem- 
ory of certain mysterious things that had hap- 
pened to them on that occasion often arose to 
disturb some of the scouts. 

“ Oh ! it ought to be easy to look out for that 
part of the job,” Paul had made answer; “be- 
cause, you see, we’ll have the two boats to store 
things in, and they can be anchored out in the lake, 
if we want, each with a guard aboard.” 

By noon the whole town knew all about the 


36 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


expected cruise. Boys who did not have the good 
luck to belong to Stanhope Troop became greatly 
excited over it; and by their actions and looks 
showed how envious they were of their school- 
mates. 

Just about then, if the assistant scout master 
had called for volunteers, he could have filled 
two complete additional patrols with candidates; 
for the fellows began to realize that the scouts 
were having three times as much fun as any one 
else. 

But Paul was too wise for that. He believed 
in selecting the right sort of boys, and not taking 
every one who offered his name, just because he 
wanted to have a good time. These fellows 
would not be able to live up to the iron-clad rules 
that scouts have got to subscribe to, and which 
are pretty much covered in the twelve cardinal 
principles which, each boy declares in the begin- 
ning, he will try and govern his life by — “to be 
trustworthy, loyal, helpful, friendly, courteous, 
kind, obedient, cheerful, thrifty, brave, clean, and 
reverent.” 

Some of the scouts were at Headquarters, as 
the room under the church was called, getting 
the supplies there in order, to take down to the 
boats later on, when they were surprised to have 
a visitor in the shape of old Peleg Growdy. 

This man lived just outside the town limits, on 


LAYING IN THE STORES 


37 


the main road. He had once kept his wagon 
yard in a very disgraceful condition, much to the 
disgust of the women folks of Stanhope. The 
boys, too, looked upon Peleg as a crusty old fel- 
low, who hated their kind. 

He had done something to offend one of the 
scouts, and it was proposed that they play some 
sort of trick on the old fellow in order to pay 
him back; but Paul ventured to say that if the 
scouts went in a bady to his place, when he was 
asleep, and cleaned up his wagon yard so that 
it looked neat, he would have his eyes opened to 
the debt he owed the community. 

Paul, it seemed, had learned the main cause of 
the old man’s holding aloof from his neighbors. 
It came from the fact that some years back he 
had lost his wife and children in the burning of 
his house ; and ever since had looked upon boys as 
especially created to worry lone widowers who 
wanted only to be let alone. 

Well, the scouts certainly made a great friend 
of Peleg Growdy. He had even tried to induce 
them to let him purchase their suits to show 
that he was a changed man; but of course they 
could not allow that, because each true scout must 
earn every cent of the money with which his out- 
fit in the beginning is bought. But in many ways 
had old Peleg shown them that he was now 


38 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


going to be one of the best friends the boys of 
Stanhope Troop had ever possessed. 

He had heard about their intended trip, when 
he came to town with some produce; and rather 
than go back home with some things for which 
there did not seem to be any sale at the price 
he wanted, he had come around with his wagon 
to ask his boy friends to please him by accepting 
them as his contribution to the cause. 

They could not disappoint the generous-heart- 
ed old man by refusing; and besides the half- 
bushel of onions, and double the quantity of new 
potatoes, looked mighty fine to the lads. 

About two o’clock, when it seemed that their 
list was about complete, even though they would 
doubtless think of a lot of things after it was too 
late to get them, Paul decided to send for the 
wagon that was to haul the tents and other things, 
including blankets for the crowd, brought from 
various homes to the meeting place, down to the 
waiting boats. 

“I wanted to get Ezra Sexton, but he was 
busy,” Jack explained, when he had carried out 
the errand given into his charge ; “ fact is, I hear. 
Bobolink, that Ezra came early this morning 
with an order from the professor, and took all 
those big cases away in his two wagons.” 

“Well, that was quick work now, wasn’t it?” 
grumbled Bobolink ; “ reckon I won’t ever have 


LAYING IN THE STORES 


39 


a chance to see what was inside those boxes. Say, 
see here, d’ye happen to know where Ezra 
hauled ’em? Not to the railroad, I should think, 
because they only came that way yesterday.” 

But Jack shook his head. 

“ Some distance off, I reckon, because the 
trucks don’t seem to be back yet, so I couldn’t get 
to see Ezra,” he remarked; “but when we come 
home again. I’ll ask my father about it, and re- 
lieve that curiosity of yours. Bobolink.” 

“ Huh I that means mebbe two weeks or so I’m 
to go on guessing, I s’pose,” the other remarked, 
in a disconsolate way that made Jack laugh. 

“ Funny how you do get a notion in that coco 
of yours; and it’d take a crowbar to work it 
loose,” he observed, at which the other only 
grinned, saying: 

“ Born that way; must ’a made a mistake and 
left the wrong article at our house for the new 
baby; thought it was a girl; always wantin’ to 
know everything, and never happy till I get it. 
But Jack, I’ll try and keep this matter out of my 
mind. Don’t pay any attention to me, if I look 
cross once in a while. That’ll be when it’s got 
me gripped fast, and I’m tryin’ to guess.” 

“ I’ve known you to do the same when you had 
one of those puzzles, trying to work it,” chuckled 
Jack Stormways. “ Fact is, I remember that once 


40 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


you told me you sat up till two o’clock in the 
morning* over that ring business.” 

“But I got her, Jack — remember that; won’t 
you? If I hadn’t I’d been burning the midnight 
oil yet, I reckon. ’Taint safe to make me a pres- 
ent of a puzzle, because I’m just dead sure to 
nearly split my poor weak brain trying to figger 
it out. And Jack, I’ll never be happy till I know 
what was in those boxes; and why did that sly 
little professor believe someone wanted to steal 
his thunder and lightning?” 

It took several loads to carry all their traps 
down :o the boats. But finally, as the groceries 
had also been delivered, the scouts took count of 
their stock, and it was believed they had about 
everything, save what the boys might bring in the 
morning from home. 

Paul advised them to go slow with regard to 
what they carried along, as they did not expect 
to be gone six months. If any garments gave out, 
why, there would be plenty of soap and water 
handy; and the fellow who did not know how to 
wash a pair of socks, or some handkerchiefs, had 
better take a few lessons on how to play laundry 
woman in an emergency. 

“ If things keep on multiplying much more,” 
the scout master remarked, as he looked around 
at the tremendous amount of stuff which the boys 
were now beginning to stow away systematically; 


LAYING IN THE STORES 


41 


“why we won’t be able to navigate the boats 
through that shallow canal at all. They’ll just 
stick fast, because they’ll be so low down in the 
water; and chances are we’ll have to spend all 
our vacation slobbering around in that mud try- 
ing to coax them along. Go slow, fellows; bring 
just as little as you possibly can in the morning. 
If there’s any doubt about it being a real neces- 
sity, why leave it at home. We’re all scouts and 
true comrades, ready to share and share alike; 
so, no matter what happens, no one will go with- 
out.” 

Of course there were many persons who came 
down to watch the loading of the supplies, for 
half of Stanhope was interested in the expedi- 
tion; and groups of envious boys could be seen 
in various nooks, taking note of all that went on, 
while they wished they had such good luck. 

No one was allowed on board who had no 
business there. Of course when any of the fath- 
ers or mothers of the boys who were going hap- 
pened along, they were only too proudly shown 
through both boats, and had everything ex- 
plained by half a ’ dozen eager scouts. But a 
couple of guards stood at the gangplank, and no 
boy was allowed aboard unless accompanied by 
his parents; and even then a strict watch was 
kept, because there were some pretty mean fel- 
lows in town, who believed in the motto of “rule 


42 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


or ruin.” When they were not allowed to play, 
they always tried their best to see to it that no 
one else played, either. 

“There’s Ted Slavin and Ward Kenwood sit- 
ting up on the bank over there, Paul,” remarked 
Jack, about half an hour before the time when 
the scouts would have to be going home to their 
suppers. 

“ IVe been watching them,” replied the scout 
master; “ and from the way they carry on, laugh- 
ing when they put their heads together, I had just 
about made up my mind that they were hatching 
up some mischief.” 

‘ Mischief I ” echoed Bobolink, who was close 
by at the moment, and heard what was being 
said; “say, that’s too nice a word to use when 
talking about the pranks of that combination. 
Ward, he supplies some of the brains, and all of 
the hard plunks; while that bully, Ted Slavin, 
does the work, or gets some of his cronies to 
do it for him. Now, I wonder if they’ll try to 
come aboard here, and play hob with our stuff, 
like they did once before when we were all ready 
to hike off on a jaunt? ” 

“ Don’t bother yourself about that. Bobolink,” 
said Paul, quietly. “ I had decided, even before 
I noticed Ward and Ted, that we must have a 
guard stay on board all night. I’m going to see 
right now what fellows can be spared. They can 


LAYING IN THE STORES 


43 

go home to supper, and some of us will wait for 
them to come back.’’ 

“Let me be one, Paul; won’t you?” pleaded 
Bobolink. 

“But you are so quick to act, and it might 
bring on trouble,” objected the other. 

“ Oh ! I’ll promise to think five times before I 
act once; and besides, there’ll be some fellow 
along, like Jack here, who can keep me quiet. Of 
course, though, if you believe I’m not fit to do 
the work, why — ” 

“ That’ll do for you. Bobolink,” Paul broke in, 
“ if your folks say you can stay, come back ready 
to camp on board. I’ll find you one or two mates 
— four if possible — so you can sleep In relays of 
twos. And I’ll also try to fix up some dodge that 
will cool those fellows off, in case they try to 
jump aboard between sunset and daylight.” 

“ Huh I I’d rather warm their jackets for ’em,” 
growled Bobolink; who, having suffered before 
at the hands of the meanest boy in Stanhope, 
Ted Slavin, had only the poorest opinion of him, 
and of those who trained in his company. 

“When I come back tonight, after supper,” 
continued Paul, “ I’m going to fetch my shotgun 
along. It might come in handy on the cruise in 
case we ran up against a wildcat, or something 
like that. And I’ve known such a thing as a 
double-barrel to be mighty useful, when fired in 


44 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


the air, to make sneaking boys nearly jump out 
of their skins with alarm — ^but always in the air, 
remember. Bobolink.” 

“Oh I don’t worry about me; my bite is not 
half as bad as my bark. I like to make out I’m 
just fierce, when all the while, if you could look 
inside, you’d find me chuckling to beat the band. 
I wouldn’t shoot a gun at anybody, unless it was 
to save another fellow’s life; and then I’d try to 
pepper his legs. Fetch the gun, Paul; it’ll come 
in real handy.” 

So, when Paul did come back after dark, he 
carried the weapon under his arm in true hunter 
style; for Paul had been several time's up in 
Maine, and knew a good deal of woodcraft, hav- 
ing had actual experience, which is better than 
theory, any day. 

These four scouts were left in charge of the 
two boats, when finally Paul went back home to 
get some sleep before the eventful day that was 
to witness the sailing of the motorboat expedi- 
tion: 

Bobolink; Tom Betts; Spider Sexton, of the 
Black Fox Patrol and Andy Flinn, who belonged 
to the Gray Foxes; and firmly did they promise 
Paul to keep a bright lookout to make sure that 
no harm came to the boats during the long night. 


CHAPTER V 


JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN 

“ Here we are, monarchs of all we survey,” re- 
marked Bobolink, as the last of the other scouts 
went off, leaving the four guards to their task of 
taking care of those two fine motorboats for the 
night. 

It was nine o’clock. 

The well-known sounds from the church 
steeple had told them that; and somehow every 
fellow counted the strokes aloud, as though on 
this night in particular they meant far more than 
at other times. 

Stanhope, not being a manufacturing town, like 
Manchester, was, as a rule, rather quiet of nights; 
except when the Glorious Fourth was being cele- 
brated; or some other holiday kept the younger 
clement on the move. 

Bobolink had been given the post of “ Captain 
of the Guards; ” while Tom Betts was to be con- 
sidered the second in command. They were tr 
divide the duties in such fashion that there would 
be two of them on deck at a time 
45 


46 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


“ ril take Andy for my mate ; and you can 
have Spider to help out,” Bobolink had told Tom, 
when they were arranging the programme. 

“And how long will the watches be ? ” demand- 
ed Spider, who liked to sleep about as much as 
any fellow in the troop; he had gained that odd 
name not because he was artful and cruel; but 
on account of his slender legs, which long ago 
some smart boy had likened to those of a spider; 
and it only requires a hint like that to establish a 
nick-name. 

“Two hours each, divided into four,” replied 
the chief, feeling the responsibility of his posi- 
tion; for this was really the first time Bobolink 
could remember being placed over any of his 
fellow scouts — Paul wished to “ try him out,” 
and discover what sort of reliance could be placed 
in the lad. 

“That’s an awful short time to get a snooze,” 
complained Spider, yawning. “ Why, you’d hard- 
ly get asleep before you’d have to wake up.” 

“ Then what’s the use going to sleep at all, at 
all?” remarked Andy Flinn, with a broad smile. 
“ Let’s draw lots to say who’ll stand guard the 
whole night.” 

“Well, I guess not,” objected Spider, vigor- 
ously. “ Half a loaf is some better’n no bread, 
they always say; and four hours ought to make a 


JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN 47 

fellow feel as though he hadn’t been shut out al- 
together from his needed rest.” 

“Needed rest is good for you, Spider; the 
only trouble is you need too much,” Bobolink re- 
marked. “ But here’s the way we’ll fix it: Andy 
and me, why, we’ll be the pioneers on the job, 
starting in right now, while you others curl up 
somewhere, and get busy taking your forty winks. 
At eleven-ten we’ll give you the foot, and take 
your places. Jack left me his little watch, so we 
could tell how time goes; but sure, you can hear 
the clock in the church steeple knock off the 
hours. And for the last time, listen to me; not 
one wink must any sentry take while on duty. 
Sleeping on post is the most terrible thing you 
can do. They shoot soldiers in war time who 
betray their trust that way. Get your instruc- 
tions, fellows ? ” 

“ I’m on to what you mean, all right,” said 
Spider; “and I guess I know my weakness, as 
well as anybody. To prove that I want to do 
the right thing. I’m going to fix it up with my 
mate to give me a jab with this pin, every time he 
gets a notion in his head that I’m drowsing.” 

“ Say, that sounds heroic all right,” remarked 
Bobolink, doubtfully; “but you don’t want to 
get too gay with that same pin, Tom. It’d be a 
shame to wake Andy and me up every ten min- 
utes, making Spider ^ve a yelp. Better just 


48 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


shake him if he acts sleepy. And above every* 
thing else, keep a bright watch along the shore.” 

“ Think they’ll be apt to come from that direc- 
tion, do you?” asked Spider. 

“Just as like as not,” the other returned; “but 
that isn’t saying you ought not to keep an eye on 
the other side, and all around. I wouldn’t put it 
past that Ted Slavin to swim down this way from 
some place above, thinking he could do his little 
trick by fooling us, and coming aboard on the 
water side.” 

“Whew I do you really think, then, he’d dare 
board these boats, knowing that they belong to 
two of the richest and most prominent citizens 
of Stanhope ? ” asked Spider, who occasionally 
liked to air his command of fine language. 

“ Well, you ought to be on to the curves of that 
Ted Slavin; and if you just look back to things 
he’s been known to do in the past, why, lots of 
times he’s played his pranks on people that had 
a pull. Why, didn’t he even sneak into the loft 
over Police Headquarters once, and rig up a 
scare that came near breaking up the force. Ted 
fixed it so the wind’d work through a knot-hole 
in the dark, whenever he chose to pull a string 
over the fence back of the house, and make the 
awfullest groaning noise anybody ever did hear. 
It got on the nerves of Chief Billings and his men. 
They hunted that loft over and over, but of 


JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN 49 


course the groans didn’t come when they were 
up there. Why, he had ’em so badly rattled that 
they all just about camped out on the pavement 
the rest of that night.” 

“ Sure, I remember that,” declared Andy 
Flinn, laughing. “ Three nights did he play the 
same joke, and then they got on to him. Wan 
officer do be sneakin’ up to the loft, while the rist 
pretended to be huntin’ around downstairs. He 
discovered the sthring, cript downstairs again, 
wint out on the sly, and, be the powers, followed 
it to the fince. Then he wint around, and jumped 
on Tid while the bhoy was a pullin’ his sthring 
like smoke, makin’ worse groanings than any time 
yit. Sure they thried to hush the joke up, the po- 
lice was that ashamed; but it cript out some 
way.” 

“ Well, get off to bed. Spider and Tom; ” said 
Bobolink, “we’ll wake you up when it’s time to 
change the watch. And remember what a nice 
little surprise we’ve got ready for anybody who 
thinks he can meddle with things that don’t be- 
long to him. Skip out now, both of you.” 

The two motorboats had been lashed side by 
side. They were about of a size, and something 
like twenty-four feet in length, with a rather gen- 
erous beam, because their owners went in for 
pleasure and comfort, rather than racing. Still, 
one of the boats, the Speedwell, was said to be 


50 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

capable of doing a mile in seven minutes, if 
pushed, on flat water; while the other, called the 
Comfort, being broader, could not do anything 
like that. 

It was easy to pass from one boat to the other, 
as they lay there. Each had a canopy top, and 
curtains that could be dropped, and buttoned, dur- 
ing a wet spell, or if the owner chose to sleep 
aboard; but on this occasion Paul had believed it 
best that these latter should remain up, so as to 
allow of free observation all around. 

A stout hawser secured the boat nearest the 
shore to a big stake that had been driven deeply 
into the earth. Thus the boats lay close beside 
a short dock that was called a landing stage. As 
the current of the Bushkill was always pretty 
strong there must be more or less of a strain on 
that hawser; but since it was comparatively new, 
the boys felt that there could not be the slightest 
danger of its breaking, unless some outside influ- 
ence were brought to bear on it, such as a keen- 
edged knife blade. 

In that case, as it was very taut, it would nat- 
urally part readily; and with consequences disas- 
trous to the safety of the two boats, which must 
be carried off down-stream in the darkness, pos- 
sibly to be driven ashore on some rocks below. 

And so Bobolink, having been duly warned 
with regard to possible trouble in connection with 


JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN 51 


that same hawser, had mentally called the rope 
his “ dead line ; ” and he watched the shore above 
that point three times as much as any other place. 

He and Andy had planned not to talk while 
on duty. If they found it necessary to say any- 
thing at all, which was hardly likely, the commu- 
nication would be in the lowest whisper. 

Bobolink was not greedy, but he really hoped 
that if any sort of trouble did come it would come 
along while he and Andy were holding the post of 
guards. He had a little fear that Spider Sexton 
might not be depended on, no matter what his 
good intentions, while Tom Betts was an un- 
known quantity. 

In case Andy happened to be sitting in one 
boat, while Bobolink was occupying the other, 
they had fixed it up so that by taking a lead pen- 
cil, the “commander” could give a few little 
light taps on the side of the craft, using his 
knowledge of the Morse code to send the mes- 
sage, and in this way ask whether his assistant 
were wideawake, and on the job, when Andy 
would send back a reply along the same order; 
for he aspired to be a signal man of the troop, 
and was daily practicing with the wigwag flags, 
as well as smoke and fire signals. 

The town clock boomed out the hour of ten. 

Bobolink had himself begun to feel rather 
sleepy, and more to arouse his dormant faculties 


52 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


than anything else, he sent a message along the 
wooden telegraph line. The reply was a bit slow 
in coming, which made him think Andy might 
also be inclined to fall into a doze. 

So Bobolink decided that he must bestir him- 
self, and give the signal more frequently. He 
would not have this, his first important commis- 
sion, turn out poorly, for a good deal. Perhaps 
his whole future usefulness as a scout who could 
be depended on in emergencies rested on the way 
he accounted for the safety of the motorboats 
this night. 

When he found himself letting his eyes shut, 
eiven for a minute, he would immediately try to 
picture the consternation that would ensue should 
a fire suddenly envelope the boats that had been 
placed in the hands of the scouts, and for which 
they would be held responsible. 

He knew Ted Slavin of old, and felt that the 
town bully would not hesitate at even such a thing 
as that. 

Then there was such a thing as cutting the haw- 
ser, and letting the boats drift down-stream, to 
bring up against some rocks that might stave a 
hole in the delicate planking. Who could tell 
but what the rope had parted under a strain? 
Sometimes a break may look like the work of a 
sharp knife; and anyway, as darkness lay upon 
the scene, with a cloudy sky overhead to hide 


JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN 53 

the young moon, the identity of the vandal could 
never be absolutely known. 

All these things Bobolink was turning over and 
over in his mind as he sat there trying to keep 
awake. 

It is one of the hardest things to do, and es- 
pecially when the subject is only a half-grown lad, 
with but a dim Idea of the responsibility depend- 
ing on the faithful discharge of his duty. 

Hello! what was that? Bobolink thought he 
surely heard a sound like muttered conversation. 
But then, even in steady old Stanhope, there were 
a number of happy-go-lucky chaps who tarried 
late in the saloons; and when they finally started 
homeward, used to talk to themselves along the 
way. Perhaps it was only one of these convivial 
fellows trying to find the way home, and get- 
ting off his course, coming to the open place along 
the river bank, intending to lie down and sleep 
his confusion off. 

Bobolink was thrilled, however, a minute later, 
when he felt sure he could again hear the low mut- 
ter of voices. It struck him that several persons 
might be urging each other on, as though inclined 
to feel the need of backing. 

It came from up-river, too, the point he meant 
to watch more than any other; and this fact In- 
creased the suspicious look of the case. 

“ Oh I it’s coming,’* whispered the eager boy to 


54 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

himself; “ and I only hope the water will be hot 
enough, that’s all.” 

His words were mysterious enough to suit any 
one ; and even while he was speaking in this man- 
ner Bobolink started to crawl under the canopy 
that sheltered him from, the dew of the night. 
He allowed the end of his pencil to throb against 
the side of the boat, giving the one significant 
word: “Come!” An immediate answer as- 
sured him that Andy heard, and understood. An- 
other minute, and the Irish boy came shuffling 
over from the other boat, trying to keep from 
making any more noise than was necessary. 

“Take hold,” Bobolink whispered in his ear, 
pulling the other’s head down close to his lips; 
“They’re coming! Be ready to go at it licketty- 
split when I say the word. Get that? ” 

“ Sure ! ” came in the faintest tone from the 
other; whereupon Bobolink, feeling that his hour 
had arrived, started once more to crawl back to 
his former position. 

But now he had something in his hands that 
looked very like a snake; or since Bobolink was 
known to fairly detest all crawling creatures, it 
might be a rope, although there are still other 
things that have that same willowy appearance — 
a garden hose, for example. 


CHAPTER VI 


THE GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN 

When Bobolink again reached the bow of the 
Comfort^ and peered above the side, he glued his 
eyes to the spot where he knew the rope lay that 
held the boats moored to the shore. 

And as the half moon condescended to peep 
from behind the dark clouds that had until now 
hidden her bright face, the scout could make out 
a flattened figure, that seemed to be hugging the 
earth, while creeping slowly forward. 

Not only one, but three more, did he see, all 
in a line, as though in this way the conspirators 
had arranged to keep their courage up to the 
sticking point. Each fellow might watch his 
mates, and see that no one lagged behind. 

Bobolink was quivering with eagerness and ex- 
citement. He figured that these night crawlers 
had only five more feet to cover before they 
would be as close to his “ dead line ” as prudence 
would dictate that he allow, since it might require 
only a single sweep of the knife to cut that rope. 

They kept on advancing as though anxious to 
55 


56 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

get the job over with, now that they had keyed 
their courage up to the proper pitch. 

Another foot was all that Bobolink meant to 
allow, and then his time would come to act. Those 
last few seconds seemed fairly to crawl, so 
wrought-up was the waiting scout; but finally he 
concluded that it was no use holding off any long- 
er. So he suddenly called out the one word: 

“ Now!’’ 

Instantly a new sound broke the silence. Bobo- 
link elevated the object he was hold in his hands. 
There came a queer, whizzing noise, like water 
squirting from the end of a nozzle; which was 
exactly what it was, and hot water in the bargain, 
not actually scalding, but of such a temperature 
to make a fellow wince, if it happened to sprinkle 
over his face. 

It was all Bobolink’s idea. He had brought a 
little garden pump aboard during the afternoon, 
with the hose that went with it. There was a 
kerosene cookstove aboard each boat, used when 
going ashore might be unwise on account of rainy 
weather; and on this the artful schemer had 
heated his water. Every time he went back to 
that quarter he tested its temperature, to see 
whether it kept up to the pitch he meant it should 
be. And Andy’s part of the job was to manipu- 
late the handle of the little pump with all his vim 
and power. 


GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN 57 


Imagine the consternation of four plotters, 
who, when just about to carry out their pleasant 
little scheme, suddenly and without warning, 
found a spray of hot water touching every ex- 
posed part of their skin! 

Do you wonder that they immediately let out 
a few yelps, and scrambling to their feet, rushed 
headlong away, followed by the laughter and 
jeers of Bobolink and his hard-working assistant. 

‘‘Go it, you tigers! My! what sprinters you 
can be, when you only half try! Come again, 
when you cool off a bit ! Plenty more of the same 
kind on tap! Don’t be bashful, Teddy; let’s 
hear from you again, and often. Whee! just 
listen to ’em howl, would you?” 

Perhaps some of those who were with Ted 
Slavin in his little game were more frightened 
than hurt by the hot water, but they certainly 
•did chatter as they kept on up the river bank. 
Little danger of them making another try to in- 
jure the boats again that night! 

Of course Spider and Tom Bates had jumped 
up at the first outbreak, ready to help repel board- 
ers. Their assistance was not needed; but they 
enjoyed the joke as much as their chums and for 
the next half hour all sat around, talking, and 
comparing notes. 

But finally silence again rested over the scene; 
Spider and Tom condescended to crawl under 


58 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


their blankets again for another “cat-nap,” as the 
former dubbed it, while Bobolink and his able as- 
sistant resumed their duties as sentries. 

The night, however, was disturbed no more by 
any outbreak. Those would-be jokers seemed to 
know when they had taken hold of what Bobo- 
link termed the “business end of a buzz-saw;” 
at any rate they were only conspicuous during the 
remainder of the night by their absence. 

Of course every one of the boys on board the 
two motorboats was glad when the first peep of 
dawn came. It had seemed about “ forty-eleven 
hours long,” Spider admitted; though he also tri- 
umphantly asked Tom Betts whether the other 
had had occasion to jab that pin into him even 
once, which the second scout laughingly admitted 
he had not. 

“See there,” Spider had declared, “can’t I 
keep awake when duty calls me? You needn’t be 
afraid to trust a Sexton, when you need a faith- 
ful watcher.” 

Before the sun appeared Paul and Jack were 
on hand, to make sure that everything was in 
shape for an early start, for they hoped to get 
away by nine o’clock. 

Others of the scouts began to drop around, and 
from the appearance of their eyes Paul was of 
the opinion that a full night’s sleep had not been 
enjoyed by many of the members of the troop. 


GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN 59 


Of course, it was the excitement of starting out on 
such a glorious cruise that kept them awake; for 
it is not given to scouts very often to enjoy such 
a prospect, afloat, with staunch motorboats given 
over into their keeping. 

Since so many things had been looked after on 
the preceding afternoon, there was really little 
to be done that morning. Every fellow was sup- 
posed to be on hand at a certain time, ready with 
his little blanket, and his haversack, in which he 
would carry a towel, some soap, a brush, an extra 
shirt, some socks and handkerchiefs; and if he 
could find a spare bit of room, why, he was en- 
titled to cram in all the crullers or other dainties 
he could manage; for after that supply was gone 
there would be only plain camp fare until they got 
home again. 

Paul was kept busy seeing that everything was 
stored away in the right place. Of course the 
supplies of food and the tents, as well as the nu- 
merous blankets, had to be divided as equally as 
possible, so that each boat would have its fair 
cargo. 

When the roster of those who could go was 
taken, just before the time came to start, and the 
others were ordered ashore, it was found that all 
told there were just eighteen fellows lucky enough 
to be in the lot. 

Some of the boys who could not go looked 


6o THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


pretty doleful as they watched the preparations. 
There were the twins, William and Wallace Car- 
berry, whose parents insisted on their going to 
the sea-shore; and Horace Poole, as well as Cliff 
Jones, of the second patrol, also compelled to 
obey the parental injunction; when, if given their 
choice, they would ten times sooner have re- 
mained at home, and had the chance of starting 
out on this wonderful cruise with their chums. 

Sandy Griggs, the butcher’s son, was laid up 
with a lame leg; while George Hurst happened 
to develop a touch of malaria, and his parents 
would not hear of him going on the water at 
such a time. As for Red Conklin and Lub Ketch- 
am, for some reason or other which they did not 
care to explain, they had been positively refused 
permission to go along; perhaps they were being 
punished for some misdemeanor; and if so, to 
judge from. the long faces they showed, the like 
would not be apt to happen again very soon; for 
It pained them dreadfully to think that they were 
to be debarred from all that glorious fun which 
the fortunate eighteen had ahead of them. 

With nine to a boat there was considerable 
crowding; but this came mostly on account of the 
tremendous amount of material carried. Why, 
one would almost be inclined to think those boys 
were going off for a whole three months, instead 
of not more than two weeks at most, to judge 


GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN 6i 


from the stuff they carried. It takes boys a long 
time to learn to plan such trips as this in light 
marching order, doing without everything save 
absolute necessities. 

Why, there was Bobolink, who ought to have 
known better, actually trying to get Paul to allow 
him to take along that little garden pump, with 
its line of hose. Just because it had come in so 
happily when those jokers meant to cut the haw- 
ser, and set the two boats adrift. Bobolink de- 
clared there could be no telling how many times 
it would prove a blessing; but Paul utterly refused 
to carry such a burden; and so in the end it was 
put ashore, and given in charge of the twins to 
return in safety to the Link garden. 

When nine o’clock -struck, everything seemed 
to be ready. 

“I can’t think of anything else; can you, 
Jack?” Paul asked his second in command, and 
who was to take charge of the Speedwell, while 
Paul himself ran the other craft. 

“ I see you’ve got the extra gas aboard, and 
that was one thing I had on my mind,” replied 
Jack. “ There’s nothing else that I knov/. Look 
at William Carberry, will you? I honestly be- 
lieve he’s figuring in his mind right now whether 
he dares go, against his home order, and jump 
aboard, to sail with us.” 

wouldn’t let him, now that I know he 


62 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


couldn’t get permission,” remarked Paul, prompt- 
ly. “We want to make a start with a clean rec- 
ord. No fellow is going without the full permis- 
sion of his folks. I’d hate to think that any 
scout sneaked off, and came anyhow. Fie wouldn’t 
have a good time, because all the while he’d be 
thinking of what was coming when he got back.” 

“ Bobolink is rubbing his chin every time he 
looks at that little garden pump,” Jack went on, 
chuckling mightily, as though he enjoyed watch- 
ing the faces of his comrades, and reading all 
5orts of things there. “ He just can’t see why 
you wouldn’t let him carry it along. I heard 
him tell how it would be good for giving us all 
a clean-off shower bath, when we went in swim- 
ming; and all that sort of thing. When he can’t 
have what he wants. Bobolink is a hard loser; 
isn’t he, Paul ? ” 

“ Well, he beats any one else in hanging on,” 
replied the other. “Now take those boxes that 
little old professor stored one night in your fath- 
er’s mill — Bobolink just can’t get them out of his 
mind; and he never will be happy till you find out 
what was in them. After that he’ll forget all 
about the things. But if everything is ready, I 
guess we might as well start.” 

When the Speedwell, being on the outside, 
started to “popping,” and then moved off, there 
was a cheer from fully five score of throats; and 


GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN 63 


counting the girls who had also come down to 
see the beginning of the motorboat cruise, there 
must have been nearly double that number on 
the bank. 

Then the roomier Comfort also made a start, 
and following in the wake of the pilot boat, turned 
until her nose pointed down-stream. Flags were 
flying from fore and aft of both boats; and the 
boys waved their campaign hats, while they sent 
back hearty cheers in answer to the many good 
wishes shouted after them by the crowd ashore, 
while Bobolink blew cheery blasts on his bugle, 
and Bluff Shipley would have beaten a lively tat- 
too on his drum, only it had been decided best to 
leave that instrument at home. 

And with all this noisy send-off, the two boats 
began to chug-chug down the Bushkill, bound for 
that far-away island in Lake Tokala, about 
which so many strange stories had from time to 
time been told. 

“Well, we’re off at last. Bobolink,” said Jack, 
who had that individual aboard with him. 

“That’s right, and everything seems lovely, 
with the goose hanging high,” replied the other. 
“ But seems to me the troop owes us guards a 
vote of thanks for serving as we did. Just think 
what a lot of grunters we’d have been this fine 
morning, if our boats had been set adrift, and 
brought up on the rocks down below, with 


64 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


chances of holes being knocked in the sides I Say, 
we’ve got a whole lot to be thankful for, Jack; 
and my old garden pump stood up to the racket 
first-rate, too.” 

“That’s true, Bobolink; and as soon as we’re 
settled in camp I’m going to make sure that the 
troop acknowledges its indebtedness to you four 
fellows by a vote of thanks, see if I don’t.” 

“ Oh say, now, I didn’t mean to hint that way,” 
objected the other, turning a little red in the 
face with confusion. “ We only did our duty, 
after all, if we did lose a lot of sleep. But then, 
I guess we got as much as a lot of the fellows 
that went to bed at home. Yes, we’re off at last, 
and things look great. I’m as happy as a lark, 
and that free from care — well, I would be, that 
is, if only somebody could up and give me just a 
hint what those boxes had in ’em. It was so fun- 
ny to have that queer professor store ’em with 
your father in his mill; and then to have some- 
body sneakin’ around, wantin’ to steal them. 
Needn’t grin at me that way. Jack; you know 
I’m a little weak in that quarter. I sure do want 
to know! Don’t suppose you’ve heard anything 
new since I talked with you last about it?” and 
as Jack shook his head in the negative, Bobolink 
looked disappointed, and turned away. 


CHAPTER VII 


STUCK FAST IN THE MUD 

“About three miles below Stanhope now; 
aren’t we, Paul?” asked Jud Elderkin, the lead- 
er of the second patrol, who, with Bluff, Nuthin, 
Joe Clausin, Gusty Bellows, Old Dan Tucker, 
Phil Towns and Little Billie, constituted the crew 
of the Comfort, commanded by the scout master 
himself. 

Jack had been given charge of the other boat, 
because Frank Savage was not feeling any too 
well, though probably he had not let his folks know 
about it, lest he be kept at home. 

“More than that, Jud,” answered the other; 
“ and in the most ticklish part of the river, too. 
I ought to signal the other boat to slow up some 
more. You see, while there are no rocks around 
here, the eddies form sandbars that keep chang- 
ing, just as I understand they do away out in the 
big Mississippi, so that a pilot on his way up-river 
finds a new channel cut out, and bars that were 
never there when he went down a week before.” 

“And notice, too, that Jack’s given over the 
65 


66 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


wheel to Bobolink, while he is back looking after 
the motor. Now, Bobolink is a cracker-jack of a 
fellow to get up all sorts of clever schemes for 
sprinkling creepers in the night; but he’s a little 
apt to be flighty when it comes to running a boat. 
There 1 what did I tell you, Paul ; they’ve run 
aground, as sure as you live I ” 

“You’re right, Jud;and it looks like the 
Speedwell might go over on her beam-ends, the 
way she’s tilted now. Good for Jack; he’s or- 
dering them all over on the upper side I That 
may keep her from toppling over!” Paul ex- 
claimed, as he gave the wheel a little turn, and 
headed straight for the boat in peril. 

“Wow! that was a right smart trick of 
Jack’s! ” cried Jud, in admiration. “ If he’d lost 
his head, like some fellows I know might have 
done, nothing’d ever kept that boat on her keel. 
And just to think what a nasty job we’d have on 
our hands, trying to right her again, and before 
our great trip had hardly started.” 

“Yes,” added Old Dan Tucker, who happened 
to be close to them, “ that ain’t the worst of it. 
You know the main part of the grub’s aboard the 
other boat. Think of those juicy hams floatin’ 
off down the Bushkill, with not a single tooth ever 
bein’ put in ’em; and all that bread and stuff 
soaked. Oh! it gives me a cold shiver to even 
think of it,” for Dan loved the bugle call that an- 


STUCK FAST IN THE MUD 


67 


nounced dining time better than any other music. 

The greatest excitement prevailed aboard both 
boats. Jack seemed to be keeping his crew 
perched along the upper rail, where their weight 
had the effect of holding the boat with the nar- 
rower beam from toppling over on her side. It 
looked like a close shave, as Jud Elderkin said, 
with that swift current rushing past on the port 
quarter, and almost lapping the rim of the cock- 
pit. 

Of course, as soon as she struck Jack had shut 
off power, so that the boat was now lying like a 
stranded little whale. 

Paul brought up alongside, looking out that he 
did not strike the same unseen sandbar. 

“Take this rope, some of you, and make fast 
to that cleat at the stern,” Paul called out, giving 
a whirl that sent it aboard the tilted motorboat. 

“What are you meaning to do, Paul; give us 
a pull back?” asked Jack, who did not seem to 
be one-half so “ rattled ” by the mishap as some 
of the other fellows; simply because he had the 
faculty of keeping his wits about him in an emer- 
gency. 

“That’s the only way I can see,” came the re- 
ply. “And as the stern is under water. Jack, 
what’s the matter with backing when we start to 
pulling? ” 

“ Not a thing, that I can see,” answered the 


68 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


skipper of the Speedwell; But I hope she slides 
off all right.” 

“Have your crew get as far aft as they can,” 
continued Paul. “ That will lighten the bow, 
more or less. And keep them all on the side 
they’re on; only as soon as she drops back on an 
even keel, they must get over, so she won’t swing 
to starboard too much. All ready, now?” 

“Yes, the rope’s tied fast to the cleat, and un- 
less you yank that out by the roots, the boat’s 
just got to move! Say when, Paul,” with which 
Jack again bent over the three horse-power motor 
with which the faster boat was equipped. 

Paul took one look around before giving the 
word. He wanted to make sure that everything 
was in readiness, so there might be no hitch. A 
mistake at that critical stage might result in bring- 
ing about the very accident they were striving to 
avoid, and as a consequence it was wise to make 
haste slowly. That is always a rule good scout 
masters lay down to the boys under their charge. 
“ Slow but sure ” is a motto that many a boy 
would be wise to take to himself through life. 

And when Paul had made certain that every- 
thing was in readiness he started the motor of 
the Comfort, reversing his lever; so that every 
ounce of force was exerted to drag the compan- 
ion boat off its sandy bed. 

Jack complied with the requirements of the 


STUCK FAST IN THE MUD 69 

situation by also starting his motor the same 
way; and with the happiest results. 

“Hurrah! she’s moving!” cried little Nuthin, 
who was not in danger, but just as much excited 
as though the reverse had been the case. 

“ There she comes ! ” yelled several of the anx- 
ious scouts, as the Speedwell was seen to start 
backward. 

“One good pull deserves another; eh, fel- 
lows ? ” cried the delighted Bobolink, who was 
wondering whether Jack would ever entrust the 
wheel to his care again, after that accident; but 
he need not have worried, for somehow the skip- 
per did not seem to feel that it was his fault. 

And Bobolink, when he was again placed in 
charge of the wheel, felt that he had had a lesson 
that would last him some time. In this sort of 
work there could be no telling what was going to 
happen; hence, each scout would be wise to re- 
member the rule by which they were supposed to 
always be guided, and “be prepared.” That 
meant being watchful, wakeful, earnest, and look- 
ing for signs to indicate trouble, so that should 
it come they would not be caught napping. 

After a little while they came in sight of Man- 
chester, with its smoking stacks, and its busy mills. 
Possibly the news of the expedition of the Stan- 
hope Troop had been carried to the boys down 
here. At any rate, there was a group of several 


70 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

f^lows wearing the well known khaki uniform, 
who waved to them from the bank and acted as 
though wishing the expedition success. They were 
pretty good fellows, those Manchester scouts, and 
the Stanhope boys liked them much more than 
they did the members of the Aldine troop up 
the river. Everybody knows there is a vast dif- 
ference in boys; and sometimes even the fellows 
in various towns will seem: to be built along cer- 
tain lines, having pretty much the same leading 
characteristics. The Manchester lads had proven 
a straight-forward set in what competitions the 
several troops had had so far. And hence every 
fellow aboard the two boats swung his hat, and 
sent back hearty cheers. 

“What’s the matter with Manchester? She’s 
all right ! ” they called, in unison, as Gusty Bel- 
lows took upon himself the duties which, on the 
ball field, made him invaluable as the “ cheer cap- 
tain.” 

His name was really Gustavus Bellows; but 
that was easily corrupted into Gusty when the 
fellows learned on his first coming to Stanhope 
what a tremendous voice he had. 

About a mile or so below Manchester, Paul 
had said, the mouth of what had once been Jack- 
son Creek, might be found. Several of the boys 
could remember having heard more or less about 
that abandoned canal; perhaps the Manchester 


STUCK FAST IN THE MUD 71 

lads knew about it, since it was closer to their 
home town. 

Everybody, then, was anxiously scanning the 
shore on the left, because they knew it must lie 
somewhere along there. 

“I see the mouth!” exclaimed Phil Towns, 
who had very keen eyesight. “ Just look on the 
other side of that crooked tree, and you’ll glimpse 
a little bar that juts out. That must be on the 
upper side of the creek’s mouth; because Paul 
said bars nearly always form there. How about 
that, Paul ? ” 

“Go up head, Phil; you’ve struck the bull’s 
eye,” replied the other, with a laugh, as he began 
to head in toward the crooked tree mentioned, 
and which doubtless he took for his landmark 
when in search of the creek. 

The Comfort was in the lead now. Jack was 
content to play “ second fiddle,” as he called it. 
As Paul had gone through the disused canal in his 
canoe, exploring it pretty thoroughly, he must act 
as pilot. 

Once they had pushed past the mouth of the 
creek they found a rather disheartening prospect. 
The water seemed very low, so that they could see 
bottom everywhere. Even Paul frowned, and 
shook his head. 

“ It surely must have lowered several inches 


>2 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


since I was here yesterday,” he declared, in dis- 
may. 

“Think we’ll get through safely?” queried 
Jud Elderkin, anxiously. ' 

“I hope we may,” replied the scout master; 
“ but we’ve just got to creep along, and be mighty 
careful. You see, most of the bed of this canal 
is mud, and not sand. Once the sharp bow starts 
to rooting in that, there’s no telling how far we’ll 
explore before letting up. And it’s surprising how 
that same mud clings. I could hardly work my 
light canoe loose two or three times. Just seemed 
like ten pair of hands had hold of her, and were 
gripping tight. Easy there. Jack, take another 
notch in your speed, old fellow I Crawl along, if 
you can. And have the poles ready to fend off, 
if we get into any bad hole.” 

The boys were strung along the sides of the 
slowly moving motorboats. Every fellow came 
near holding his breath with nervousness. 

“ Excuse me from getting stuck here in this 
nasty mess,” remarked Nat Smith, on board the 
roomier boat with Jack, Bobolink, Tom Betts, 
Andy Flinn, Curly Baxter, Spider Sexton, Frank 
Savage and Bob Tice. 

“Why, we might stay here a week,” observed 
the last mentioned, in a voice that told plainly 
how little he would relish such a mishap, when 
they had planned such splendid times ahead. 


STUCK FAST IN THE MUD 


73 


“All summer, if it didn’t rain, because the creek 
would get lower all the time.” Paul himself ob- 
served, with emphasis, wishing to make every 
scout resolve to avoid this catastrophe, if it were 
at all possible. 

“Who’d ever think,” remarked Jud, “that 
there was such a queer old place as this not more’n 
seven miles away from home? And not one of 
us ever poked a boat’s nose up this same creek 
before Paul came down, to spy out things.” 

“Oh! well, there’s a reason for that,” replied 
Phil Towns, who knew all about everything that 
had ever happened in and around Stanhope. 
“ Until lately, when the scouts organized in these 
three towns, the boys of Stanhope and those of 
Manchester never had much to do with each 
other. Many’s the stone fight I’ve been in with 
those big mill chaps. Sometimes we whipped 
them ; and then again they chased us right home. 
So no Stanhope boy ever dared go far down the 
river in the old days. That’s the reason, I guess, 
why none of us ever tried to explore this place. 
Say, we seem to be getting in worse and worse, 
Paul. It isn’t more’n a foot deep over there on 
the right, and less’n ten inches here on the left.” 

“ I know it, Phil, and I’m beginning to be 
afraid we’ll have to back out of this the best way 
we can,” replied the scout master, reluctantly; 


74 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

for his heart had been set on carrying out this 
plan, and he hated to be compelled to give it up. 

Hardly had he spoken than the boat brought 
up with a jolt that came near throwing several 
of the scouts into the water and mud. They had 
run aground after all! Paul turned the motor 
to the reverse, and the little propeller fairly siz- 
zled in its mad efforts to drag the craft back into 
clear water, but it was just as Paul had said — 
there seemed to be innumerable hands clinging 
fore and aft that refused to let go. And in spite 
of all the work of the motor they did not move 
an inch. 

“ Rotten luck! ” exploded Jud Elderkin, as he 
looked helplessly around, as if to see whether a 
fellow could at least jump ashore; but since ten 
feet of that ooze lay on either side, he failed to 
get much encouragement. 

“Ahoy, Speedwell, you’ll have to give us a 
lift! ” called Paul, making a megaphone out of his 
hands. 

“Y-y-yes, t-t-turn about’s f-f-fair p-p-play,” 
added Bluff, waving his bugle. “We p-p-pulled 
you off, and n-n-now you g-g-got to return the 
f-f-favor.” 

“Listen!” said Paul, sharply; “Jack’s calling 
something.” 

And as they all lined up along the side of the 


STUCK FAST IN THE MUD 


75 

Comfort they heard Jack’s voice come across the 
forty feet of water and mud, saying: 

“Only wish we could, Commodore; but sad 
to say, we’re stuck about as fast in this lovely 
mess as you are, and can’t budge her an inch I ” 


CHAPTER VIII 


WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED 

“ Well, here is a pretty kettle of fish I ” grunt- 
ed the disgusted Jud. “We seem to take to 
sandbars and mud flats today to beat the band.” 

Paul had stopped the motor, since it seemed 
useless. But of course he did not mean to give up 
trying to get the boat off. 

“One thing’s sure,” he said, positively, when 
the others gathered around him, as if in this 
emergency they looked to the scout master to 
invent some method of beating the sticky mud 
at its own game; “every minute we stay here 
makes it all the worse for us.” 

“Yes, because our weight is sure to make the 
boat sink deeper in her nest! ” declared Little Bil- 
lie, leaning far over the side, as if to see how far 
down in her muddy bed the boat lay. 

“Yes,” that’s one thing,” added Paul; “but an- 
other is the fact that the creek is falling all the 
time. Unless it rains, there’ll soon be nothing 
but mud around us. Now, every fellow crowd 
back here, and leave the bow as free as we can. 

76 


WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED 77 


That might loosen the grip of the mud; and 
when I turn on the motor at full speed again, let’s 
hope she’ll move.” 

It was a sensible suggestion; and indeed, about 
the only thing possible, since the other boat, being 
in the same fix, could not come near, either to 
give a friendly tug, or take off the Comforfs 
crew. 

When he had them all as far in the stern as 
they could get, with a warning not to allow them- 
selves to be shaken loose, unless they wanted a 
mud bath, the skipper started his motor work- 
ing. 

When it was going at full (speed the boat 
quivered and strained, but did not move, so far 
as any one could see; and they were all eager to 
detect the first sign of motion. 

“No good!” sighed Jud. “Might as well 
look the thing in the face, fellows. Here we stay, 
and eat up all our grub, day after day. Ain’t it 
fierce, though? How d’ye suppose we’ll ever 
stand it? If anybody had a pair of wings now, 
and could fly ashore, we might get help to pull 
us out. But we couldn’t use our wigwag flags, 
even if we tried, because who’d see ’em? Oh! 
what tough luck I ” 

Paul may have felt somewhat discouraged him- 
self, but he was not the fellow to betray the fact 
— so early in the game, at least. 


78 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

“Well, Jud,” he said, soberly, “perhaps we 
may have to stick it out here for a while, but I 
hope it won’t be as bad as you say. And make 
up your mind that if we do, it’ll be a mighty 
strange thing, with eighteen wideawake scouts to 
think up all sorts of schemes and dodges that we 
can try.” 

“ That’s the stufF, Paul I ” exclaimed Phil 
Towns. “ Every fellow ought to get right down 
to hard pan, and try to think up some way of 
beating this old sticky mud. What’s the use of 
being scouts, if we let a little thing like this get the 
better of us? If I could only wade ashore. I’d 
fix a hawser to a tree back there, and then by 
workin’ the engine p’raps we might pull the boat 
off. I’ve seen ’em do that with a steamboat, away 
down on Indian River, when I was with my folks 
in Florida last winter. And it worked, too.” 

“ Well, try the wading; it looks fine ! ” laughed 
Joe Clausin. 

“ Don’t think of it,” called out Gusty Bellows 
at that moment. “ I stuck this pole down in the 
soft slush, and my stars I it goes right through to 
China, I reckon. Anyhow, I couldn’t reach bot- 
tom. And if you jumped over, Phil, you’d be up 
to your neck at the start. Let’s tie a rope under 
your arms first, anyhow.” 

But Paul quickly put an end to all this sort of 
talk. 


WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED 79 


“There’s no use trying anything like that,” he 
said. “ Even if you did reach the shore, we 
haven’t got a rope long and strong enough to do 
the business. Besides, we may have help soon.” 

With that all the boys began craning their 
necks, as if they expected to see some kind of a 
queer craft that could pass over mud as easily 
as other boats did water, bearing down on them, 
with the design of dragging them from the bank. 

“ Say, what does he mean? For the life of me 
I can’t glimpse anything worth shucks; and the 
blooming old Speedwell seems to be sticking tight 
and fast, just the same way we are. Loosen up, 
Paul, and put us wise; won’t you?” pleaded Phil. 

“ I didn’t mean that any living thing was going 
to hold out a hand to us,” remarked the smiling 
scout master; “but look aloft, boys, and see 
what’s coming.” 

With that they followed his instructions. 

A general shout went up. 

“Wheel rain a-comin’ down on us! Get the 
curtains ready to button fast, boys, or we’ll have 
all our fine stuff soaked through and through.” 
Little Billie called, himself setting things in mo- 
tion by seizing one of the rolled curtains, and 
letting it come down, to be fastened around the 
cockpit by means of gummets and screws. 

“ But Paul meant something else,” declared 
Jud Elderkin, wisely. “You see, if only that 


8o THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


rain does come, and it’s heavy enough, there’s 
going to be a lot more water in this old canal 
than we need to pull through with. You know 
how quick the Bushkill River rises; and I guess 
it’s the same way with the Radway.” 

“ Oh ! don’t we wish that there’ll just be a lit- 
tle old cloud-burst!” cried Gusty Bellows. “I 
could stand anything but staying here seven or 
ten days, doin’ nothing, only eat, and stare at this 
mud, and wish I was back home. Come on, lit- 
tle clouds ; get a move on you, and let’s hear you 
growl like thunder.” 

They had by now called the attention of the 
others to the prospects for rain. Indeed, as soon 
as the first curtain fell, some of Jack’s crew took 
note of the significant fact, and they could be 
seen looking up at the blackening heavens. There 
had been very few times in the past when those 
boys had hoped it would rain. Perhaps, when 
they were kept home from a picnic — for reasons 
— some of them may have secretly wished the 
clouds would let down a little flood, so that those 
who had been lucky enough to go, might not have 
such a laugh on them after all. 

But certainly they never felt just as they did 
now, while watching the play of those gathering 
storm clouds. 

“And the best of the joke is,” commented Jud, 
with a grin, “ that lots of the good folks at home 


WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED 8i 


right now are looking up at those same black 
clouds, and pitying us boys. They don’t realize 
how we’re just praying that the rain won’t turn 
out a fizzle, after all. Wasn’t that a drop I felt?” 
till that gray gets nearly overhead,” remarked 
till that gray gets nearly overhead, remarked 
Paul, pointing up 'at a line marked across the 
heavens about half-way toward the horizon, and 
in the direction of the wind. 

“It’s getting dark, anyway,” remarked Nuthin, 
rather timidly; for truth to tell, the small boy 
had never ceased to remember how, earlier in the 
season, when in camp up near Rattlesnake Moun- 
tain, a terrible storm had struck them and as he 
clung desperately to the tent they were trying to 
hold down, he had actually been carried up into 
the branches of a tree, from which position only 
the prompt work of his fellow scouts had finally 
rescued him. 

“And look at that flash of lightning, would 
you?” echoed Joe Clausin. “Wow! that was a 
heavy bang; wasn’t it? Tell you now, that bolt 
must ’a struck somethin’ 1 Always does, they say, 
when it comes quick like that.” 

“ How’s the cover; just as snug as you can 
make it, boys?” demanded Paul; “because we’ll 
likely get a bit of a blow first, before the rain 
comes, and it’d be a bad job if we lost this whole 
business. Stand by to grab hold wherever you 


82 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

can. After that, if we weather it all right, 
there’ll be no trouble.” 

“And say, she’s coming licketty-split, believe 
me,” called Jud. “I c’n hear it hummin’ 
through the trees over there like the mischief. 
Take hold, everybody; and don’t let it get away 
from you I ” 

“We’ll all go up together this time, then I” 
muttered little Nuthin; but with the grit that 
seemed a part of his nature, once he started in 
to do anything, he also seized the canvas cover- 
ing at the bottom, and set his teeth hard. 

With a roar the wind struck them. Had it 
come from the right quarter Paul believed it 
might have helped work them loose; but it hap- 
pened unfortunately that just the reverse was the 
case. If anything, they were driven on the mud- 
bank all the harder. 

But at any rate the tarpaulin canopy did not 
break loose, and that was something to be satis- 
fied with. 

The wind whooped and howled for perhaps 
three minutes. Then it died down, as if giving 
up the attempt to tear the boat’s top out of the 
hands of the determined boys. 

“ The worst’s over, fellows I ” called Paul, 
breathing hard. 

“Hurrah! that’s better’n saying it is yet to 
come. How’d the Speedwell make out?” Jud 


WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED 83 

asked, sinking back on a th^vart, the better to find 
some place to peep out. 

“Seems to be all there,” replied Nuthin, who 
had been quicker to look than the more clumsy 
Jud. “ She’s got her cover on, and I guess that 
means they’re safe and sound; but she don’t seem 
to be floatin’ worth a cent. 

“No more are we; but listen, there comes the 
rain. Now for it,” observed Paul, as with a rush 
the water began to descend, rattling on the roof 
of the canopy cover. 

“ Fine ! Keep right along that way for a while, 
and something’s bound to get a move on it, which 
I hope will be our two boats ! ” cried Gusty Bel- 
lows. 

“ Did you ever hear it come down heavier than 
that?” demanded Old Dan Tucker, as he looked 
anxiously around to see that none of the cargo 
was exposed to the flood. 

“Wonder if this old thing sheds water?” sug- 
gested Jud, looking up at the heavy canopy as 
though he fancied that he felt a stream trickling 
down the back of his neck. 

“You can bank on it,” declared Joe Clausin. 
“Anything Mr. Everett owns has got to be gilt- 
edged. And he’d never stand for a leaky canopy. 
What’ re you lookin’ at out there, Paul?” for the 
scout master was leaning a little out on the side 
away from their companion boat in misery. 


84 T HE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


“Why, you see,” replied the scout master, 
drawing his head back, “ I fixed a little contriv- 
ance here, just before the storm broke, and I’m 
looking now to see whether it shows the least gain 
in water. I marked this pole with inches, and 
rammed it just so far in the mud. If the water 
starts to rising any, I can tell as soon as I look.” 

“And is she going up yet? ” asked Jud, eagerly, 

“ Well, it wouldn’t be fair to expect that for 
some time yet,” replied Paul. “At the best I ex- 
pect we’ll have to stay here an hour or so, until 
the water up-stream has a chance to come down. 
I hope it may surprise me, and get here quicker 
than that. And boys, if we have to spend all that 
time doing nothing, why we might try that little 
oil stove Mr. Everett has, and see how it can get 
us a pot of coffee, with our cold lunch.” 

“ What time is it now? ” asked Jud; while Old 
Dan Tucker pricked up his ears, at the prospect 
of “ something doing ” along his favorite line. 

“ Going on eleven; and I had my breakfast aw- 
ful early! ” remarked Little Billie. 

“And I had hardly a bite — reckon I was too 
much excited to eat — so I’m mighty near starved 
right now,” declared Dan Tucker; but then the 
boys had known him to put up that same sort 
of a plea only an hour after devouring the big- 
gest meal possible, so they did not expect to see 


WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED 85 

him collapse yet awhile from weakness through 
lack of food. 

All the same, Paul agreed that it might serve 
to distract their minds If they did have lunch. 
He also asked Jud to get in communication with 
those on the other boat, If the rain had let up 
enough for them to exchange signals, and by 
means of the flag, tell them what those on the 
Comfort meant to do. 

Just as Bobolink, who answered, had informed 
them that those under Jack were about to follow 
the same course, Paul took another glance at his 
rude water gauge. 

When he drew In his head, Jud, who had been 
waiting to tell what the others reported, saw that 
Paul was smiling as though pleased. 

“What’s doing. Commodore?” he asked. 

“ The water has risen half an Inch, and Is still 
going up,” replied Paul. 

At that there was a roar of delight — only Old 
Dan Tucker was so busy watching the lunch being 
got ready, he did not seem to hear the joyous 
news. 


CHAPTER IX 


ON THE SWIFT RADWAY 

“Let me work my flags a little, and tell the 
other boat the news! ” suggested Jud; and as no 
one objected he got busy. 

It was good practice, and he had something 
worth while to communicate, so Jud enjoyed the 
task. 

By the time he was through, lunch was ready, 
the coffee having boiled enough to please the 
most critical among the boys. 

“ Rain seems to be letting up some,” remarked 
Gusty Bellows, as they gathered around to dis- 
cuss what was to be their first meal of the trip. 

“ Oh 1 I hope it isn’t going to tantalize us, and 
raise our hopes only to dash ’em down again,” 
said Gusty. 

“ From the signs I don’t think we’re through 
with it all yet,” Paul observed; and as they had 
considerable faith in the acting scout master as a 
weather prophet, there arose a sigh of satisfac- 
tion at this remark. 


86 


ON THE SWIFT RADWAY 


87 


** Take a look, and see if she’s still moving up 
the scale, Paul,” begged the anxious Phil Towns. 

When this had been done, there was a look of 
eager expectancy on every face. 

“Over a full inch since the start,” Paul re- 
ported. 

“And that’s nearly half an hour back,” com- 
plained Gusty. “ Gee ! if it goes up as slow as 
that, we’ll be camping here at sun-down, sure, 
fellers.” 

“Oh! I don’t know,” Paul put in, confidently; 
“you must remember that the rain has fallen ail 
over the watershed that supplies both these riv- 
ers; and this canal now serves as a link between 
the two. If either one rises a good deal, we’re 
just bound to get the benefit of that little flood. 
Even at an inch an hour we could be moving out 
of this before a great while. And I expect that 
the rise will do better than that, presently. Just 
eat away, and wait. Nothing like keeping cool 
when you just have to.” 

“Yes, when you tumble overboard, like I did 
once on a time,” chuckled Jud. “ I kept perfect- 
ly cool; in fact, none of you ever saw a cooler 
feller; because it was an ice-boat I dropped out 
of; and took a header into an open place on the 
good old Bushkill. Oh! I can be as cool as a 
cucumber — when I have to.” 

An hour later Paul announced that the rise had 


88 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

not only kept up as he predicted, but was increas- 
ing. 

“Here’s good news for you, fellows,” he re- 
marked, after examining his post, “if it keeps 
on rising like it’s doing right now, we’ll be start- 
ing in less than another hour! ” 

“ Whoopee ! that suits me I ” cried Gusty, en- 
thusiastically. 

“ Ditto here,” echoed Jud. “ I never was born 
for inaction; like to be doing something all the 
time.” 

“So do I,” Paul observed, quietly; “but when 
I find myself blocked in one direction I just turn 
in another, and take up some other work. In that 
way I manage not only to keep busy, but to shunt 
off trouble as well. Try it some time, Jud, and I 
give you my word you’ll feel better.” 

But that next hour seemed very long to many 
of the impatient boys. They even accused the 
owner of the watch of having failed to wind it 
on the preceding night, just because it did not 
seem inclined to keep pace with their imagina- 
tion. 

The water was rising steadily, if slowly, and 
some of them declared that there was now a per- 
ceptible motion to the boat whenever they moved 
about. 

Urged on by an almost unanimous call, Paul 
finally agreed to start the motor again, and see 


ON THE SWIFT RADWAY 89 

what the result would be. , So Jud sent the order 
to the second boat by means of his signal flags. 

When the cheerful popping of the Comforts 
exhaust made itself heard, there was an almost 
simultaneous cheer from the scouts. 

“ WeVe off! ” they shouted, in great glee. 

“ Goodbye, old mud bank 1 ” cried Gusty, wav- 
ing his hand in mock adieu to the unlucky spot 
where so much precious time had been wasted. 
“ See you later! ” 

‘‘Not much we will!” echoed Joe Clausin. 
“ Fve got that spot marked with a red cross in 
my mind, and if this boat ever gets close to it 
again, you’ll hear this chicken cackle right smart. 
It’s been photographed on my brain so that I’ll 
see it lots of times when I wake up in the night.” 

“ How about the other boat? ” asked Paul, who 
was stooping down to fix something connected 
with the motor at the time, and could not stop 
to look for himself, although he could hear the 
throbbing of the Speedwells machinery. 

“ Oh ! she slid off easier than we did, I reckon,” 
remarked Old Dan Tucker, now snuggled down 
comfortably, and apparently in a mood to take 
things easy, since it would be a long time between 
“ eats.” 

“Tell them to go slow, all the same, Jud,” 
Paul remarked. 

“You don’t seem to trust this creek as much 


90 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


as you might, Paul?” chuckled Gusty, who was 
handling the wheel, during the minute that Paul 
was busy. 

Well, after that experience I confess that Pm 
a little suspicious of all kinds of mud banks. 
They’re the easiest things to strike up an ac- 
quaintance with, and a little the hardest to say 
goodbye to, of anything I ever met. Give her a 
little twist to the left. Gusty. That place dead 
ahead don’t strike me as the channel. That’s 
the ticket. I guess we missed another slam into 
a waiting mud bank. Now Pll take the wheel 
again, if you don’t mind.” 

“Rain’s over!” announced Little Billie. 

“ Looks like it, with that break up yonder,” Jud 
remarked, glancing aloft. “Hope so, anyhow. 
We’ve had all the water we needed, and if it kept 
on coming we’d be apt to find things kind of damp 
up there at the island.” 

The mention of that word caused several of 
the boys to glance quickly at each other. It was 
as though a shiver had chased up and down their 
spinal columns. For Joe and Little Billie, and 
perhaps Gusty Bellows, were not quite as easy 
in their minds about that “ghost-ridden” island 
as they might have been; although, if taken to 
task, all would doubtless have stoutly denied any 
belief in things supernatural. 

The Comfort acted as the pilot boat, and led 


ON THE SWIFT RADWAY 


91 


the way, slowly but surely, with the Speedwell not 
far behind. The latter had one or two little 
adventures with flirting mud banks, but nothing 
serious, although on each occasion the cries of dis- 
may from the crew could be plainly heard aboard 
the leading craft. 

And so they came in sight of a river that had 
a decided current, after the smart shower had 
added considerably to its flow. By now the sun 
was shining, and the rain clouds had about van- 
ished, being “hull-down’’ in the distance, as Jud 
expressed it; for since they were now on a voy- 
age, he said that they might as well make use 
of such nautical terms as they could remember. 

“That’s the roaring Radway, I take it,” ob- 
served Gusty, as all of them caught glimpses of 
the river through the trees ahead. 

“Just what it is,” replied Paul; “and as it 
has quite a strong current, we’re going to have 
our hands full, pushing up the miles that lie be- 
tween here and our camping place.” 

“But we c’n do it before dark; can’t we, 
Paul?” asked Phil Towns. 

“ Sure we can, if nothing happens to knock us 
out,” said Gusty, before the other could reply. 
“Why, we’ve got several hours yet, if we did 
have such tough luck in the blooming old canal.” 

“We ought to be mighty glad we got off as 
as easy as we did, that’s what!” declared Old 


92 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


Dan Tucker, who was something of a philoso- 
pher in his way, and could look at the bright side 
as well as the next one, always providing the 
food supply held out. 

Ten minutes later the Comfort was in Radway 
River, headed up-stream. Just as Paul had said, 
the current prQved very swift, and while the little 
motor worked faithfully and well, their progress 
was not very rapid. 

Besides, it kept them always on the watch. No 
one was acquainted with the channel, and the pres- 
ence of rocks might not always be detected from 
surface indications. Some of the treacherous 
snags were apt to lie out of sight, but ready to 
give them a hard knock, and perhaps smash a 
hole in the bow. 

And so Paul stationed two boys in positions 
where they could watch for every suspicious ed- 
dy, which was to be brought to his attention im- 
mediately it was discovered. 

An hour passed, and they were still moving 
steadily up the river. Paul, in reply to many 
questions by his impatient comrades, announced 
that to the best of his knowledge they ought to 
arrive at their destination an hour and more be- 
fore dark; which pacified the croakers, who had 
been saying the chances were they would have to 
spend their first night on the bank, short of the 
island by a mile or more. 


ON THE SWIFT RADWAY 


93 


“That’s all right,” Old Dan Tucker had re- 
marked; “just so long as we get ashore in time 
to build our cooking fire, it suits me.” 

Everything seemed to be moving along with 
clock-like regularity, the boat breasting the cur- 
rent and throwing the spray in fine style, when 
Jud gave a cry. 

“Something’s happened to the Speedwell!** 
he announced. 

Of course every eye was instantly turned back, 
and they were just in time to see something that 
announced the truth of Jud’s assertion. 

Andy Flinn stood up in the bow of the second 
boat, which no longer chugged away as before, 
and he threw something out that splashed in the 
water. 

“ It’s their anchor ! ” cried Jud. “ Either some- 
body’s overboard, or else their motor’s broken 
down ! ” 

“ It’s the motor, I guess,” Paul observed. “ Get 
out our anchor, and follow suit.” 


CHAPTER X 


DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES 

A MINUTE later both motorboats lay anchored 
in the middle of the swift-flowing Radway, and 
about sixty feet apart. 

“What’s the matter?” shouted Jud, taking it 
upon himself to learn the facts in the quickest 
possible time, so that signal flags were not used. 

“ Something’s happened to our motor; but Jack 
thinks he can fix her up, given a little time,” came 
in the voice of Bobolink. 

“Well, call on us if we can help out any,” Paul 
shouted; for the slapping of the water against 
the sides of the boat, as well as over the stones 
OR either hand, made it hard to hear plainly. 

“What if they can’t fix the motor up?” re- 
marked Phil Towns ; “ I hope that won’t mean 
we’ve got to spend the whole night out here in 
the middle of the river.” 

“Oh! if it comes to the worst, we can tow her 
ashore; and then it’s camp on the river bank for 
ours,” announced Paul, cheerfully. He always 
seemed to have plans made up in advance, as 
94 


DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES 95 

though anticipating every trouble that could 
arise, and getting ready for it. 

“Huh I that mightn’t be so bad, after all,” 
grunted Joe Clausin; and even Gusty Bellows 
and Little Billie nodded their heads, as if agree- 
ing that there were things less desirable than 
camping on the bank. 

The minutes dragged along, until half an hour 
had gone. Even Paul began to show signs of 
restlessness. He finally made a megaphone of 
his hands, and called to Bobolink: 

“Tell Jack to step up; Pd like to ask him a 
question or two.” 

“Ay, ay, sir,” replied the other, touching his 
forelock in true man-o’-war style, and immediately 
the head of Jack appeared. 

“What’s the good word. Jack?” asked the 
Commodore of the expedition. “ Can you make 
tlie mend, d’ye think; and just about how long is 
it going to take you?” 

“ Between five and ten minutes, not more,” 
came the reply; “ I’ve got the hang of it now, and 
the end’s in sight.” 

“Whoopee! that sounds good to me!” shout- 
ed Gusty Bellows, waving his hat. 

Five minutes had hardly passed before they 
heard the familiar pop-pop-pop of the Speedwell* s 
motor exhaust. 

“How is it?” called Paul once more. 


96 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

“ Fine and dandy,” answered Bobolink, wav- 
ing his bugle; and giving a few vigorous blasts to 
indicate that victory was nigh. 

“They’re hauling in the anchor, which is a 
good sign,” declared Nuthin. 

Presently both boats were again breasting the 
stream. Apparently no serious result had come 
from the accident, save that more than a good 
half-hour had been wasted. But still Paul de- 
clared that he had hopes of making their desti- 
nation before darkness set in. 

The sun was getting very low, and the river 
looked desolate indeed. It was bordered by 
swampy land; and where the ground showed, 
there seemed to be such a vast number of rocks 
that farming had never been attempted. 

“What d’y’e suppose is in those marshes?” 
Gusty asked, after they had passed about the 
fifth. 

“ I understand that a lot of cranberries are 
gathered here every Fall, and sent down to the 
cities for the market,” Jud Elderkin replied. 

“And seems to me a bear was killed last year 
somewhere up here, ” Nuthin’ put in, rather 
timidly. “ So I’m glad you brought that gun 
along, Paul. We are not lookin’ for a bear, be- 
cause we never lost one; but if he did come to 
camp it’d be nice to feel that we could give the 
old chap a warm reception. ” 


DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES 97 


“ Huh ! I can see the warm reception he’d 
get, ” chuckled Jud. “ Seventeen trees would each 
one have a scout sitting up in the branches as quick 
as hot cakes. Guess Paul would have to be the 
reception committee all alone. ” 

“ Don’t you believe it,” remarked Gusty Bel- 
lows; “You’d see me making for the axe in a big 
hurry. I believe in an axe. It makes one of the 
greatest weapons for defence you ever saw. I’ve 
practiced swinging it around, and I know just how 
to strike. ” 

“Well, we’ll remember that; won’t we, fel- 
lows?” remarked Jud, with a laugh. “ Plenty of 
axe exercise Gusty needs, to keep him in trim for 
bears; and I can see now how our firewood is go- 
ing to be attended to. ” 

They kept pushing on all the while ; and there 
was never a time that the lookout did not have to 
keep his eyes on the alert, because of the traps 
and snares that lay in wait for the voyagers up 
the rough Radway. 

“ Great river, I don’t think! ” Joe Clausin ven- 
tured to remark, after they had done considerable 
dodging, to avoid a mass of rocks that blocked 
the way in a direct line. 

“ Still, you’ll notice that there’s always a pass- 
age around, ” said Paul. “ It’s that way with 
nearly everything. Lots of times we don’t see the 


98 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


opening till we get right on it, and then all of a 
sudden, there’s the path out. ” 

“ I guess you’re right, Paul, ” observed Joe. 
“Things do happen to a fellow sometimes, in a 
funny way, and just when he feels like giving up, 
he sees the light. You remember a lot of trouble 
I had once, and how it turned out splendidly? 
And so I learned my lesson, I sure did. I look at 
things different now. It showed me how silly it is 
to worry over things that you can’t help. ” 

“ But all the same, ” remarked Gusty, “ I wish 
we had a squint at that same old lake ahead. It’s 
getting sunset, and beyond, Paul. ” 

“ I know it, and we must be pretty near the 
place now, ” replied the scout master. “ Unless 
we see it inside of ten minutes I’ll have to give the 
word to turn in to the shore at the next half-way 
decent landing, where there seems to be enough 
water to float our boats. ” 

“ There’s a good place right now, ” declared 
Joe, pointing; “ and we mightn’t run across as fine 
a landing again. ” 

“Ten minutes, I said,” repeated Paul, posi- 
tively; because he believed that there were certain 
signs to tell him they would come in sight of the 
big lake, from which the Radway flowed, after 
they had turned the next bend. 

So-mehow the others seemed to guess what he 


DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES 99 


had in mind, and all were anxiously watching as 
they drew near the bend. 

As the trees ceased to shut out their view, they 
gave a shout of delight, for the lake was there, 
just as Paul had anticipated. 

“ Whew I she’s a big place, all right ! ” declared 
Jud, as they looked toward the distant shore, 
where the trees seemed lost in the shadows. 

“ I never dreamed there was a lake like this so 
near Stanhope,” declared Joe, as he stared. “ That 
one up by Rattlesnake Mountain could be put in 
a corner of Tokala, and wouldn’t be missed. And 
say, that must be the island over yonder; don’t 
you think so, Paul ? ” 

“ Look and see if you can sight a cedar growing 
on the top of the hill that they say stands in the 
middle of the island,” suggested the scout master, 
still busy at the wheel; for the danger was not yet 
all over, as they had not entered the lake itself, 
though very near. 

“ It’s there, all to the good! ” announced Jud. 

“Anybody could see that” added Gusty, who 
was a little jealous of the superior eyesight of sev- 
eral of his comrades, he being a trifle near-sighted. 

“ Well, if we are going to make a job of it, the 
sooner it’s over the better,” was the queer remark 
Joe made ; but no one paid any particular attention 
to his words, they were so taken up with watching 
the island. 


loo THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


And so the leading motorboat left the noisy wa- 
ters of the Radway, and glided into the smoother 
lake, much to the satisfaction of the crew; for the 
boys had grown tired of the constant need of 
watchfulness in avoiding reefs and snags. 

Paul shut off power, and waited to see whether 
the companion boat succeeded in reaching the calm 
waters of the big lake as successfully as they had 
done. As it was now pretty close to dark, in spite 
of the half-moon that hung overhead, seeing the 
partly hidden rocks was not an easy task. 

And so he watched with not a little concern the 
progress of the Speedwell during those last few 
minutes. But Jack was alive to the situation; and 
managed to bring his boat safely through, being 
greeted with a cheer from those on board the wait- 
ing Comfort, 

“Now it’s straight for the island I ” called out 
Bobolink, as the boats drew together, and the mo- 
tors started as cheerfully as if they had not under- 
gone a hard day’s work from the time the voy- 
agers left Stanhope. 

“ We’ll have to make camp by firelight, that’s 
plain,” grumbled Gusty. 

“ What’s the odds, so long as we get fairly com- 
fortable for the night?” Bobolink retorted, being 
one of the kind who can make the best of a bad 
bargain when necessary. “All we want to do is 
to get the tents up and a fire going, so we can cook 


DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES loi 


something. Then in the morning we’ll do all the 
fancy fixing you can shake a stick at, and try out 
all the new wrinkles every fellow’s had in mind 
since our last camp. This is what I like. A lake 
for me, with an island In it that nobody lives on, 
but p’raps an old wildcat or a she bear with cubs.” 

“ But they say something does live on it, and 
that he’s a terror too ; a real wild man that’s got 
hair all over him like a big baboon — I heard It 
from a man that saw him once, and he wouldn’t 
lie about It either,” Joe Clausin called out. 

Although the rest of the scouts mocked him, and 
pretended to jeer at the idea of such a thing as a 
wild man existing so near Stanhope, nevertheless, 
as the two motorboats gradually shortened the 
distance separating them from the mysterious 
island, they gazed long at the dark mass lying 
on the still water of the big lake and its gloomy 
appearance affected them. 

Just as Joe Clausin had said', it had a real 
“spooky” air, that, at the time, with night at 
hand, did not impress them very favorably. 


CHAPTER XI 


THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND 

It was with extreme caution that the two motor- 
boats crept along the shore of the island, with nu- 
merous eyes on the lookout for a good landing 
place. 

“ Seems to be plenty of water right here,” re- 
marked Jud, who was sounding with one of the 
poles. “ Eight feet, if an inch, Paul.” 

Paul shut off the power immediately. 

“ And this looks like the best sort of place to 
make our landing,” he said. “ If we don’t like it, 
or find a better for a permanent camp in the morn- 
ing, we can change. Get busy with the poles, fel- 
lows, and shove the boat alongside that bank 
there.” 

This was readily done, and Jud was the first to 
jump ashore. He wanted to be able to say that of 
the whole troop he had landed before any one else, 
ghost or no ghost. 

Soon the others followed suit, even if Joe and 
Little Billie — and yes. Gusty Bellows also looked 
timidly around. There was Nuthin, always reck- 
102 


THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND 103 

oned a rather timorous chap, showing himself in- 
different to spirits, and all such things. What both- 
ered Nuthin concerned material things, like cats, 
and dogs, and wandering bears; he snapped his 
fingers at spooks, because he had never seen one, 
and did not believe in “ fairy stories,” as he called 
them, anyway. 

As the second boat came alongside, and her 
crew swarmed over the side, there were plenty of 
hands to do things, though they naturally looked 
to Paul for orders. 

“ A fire, first, fellows ! ” called out the scout 
master; “so we can see what we’re doing. Be- 
cause it’s getting pretty dark around here, with 
these trees overhead. Jud, you take charge of 
that part, and the rest gather wood.” 

Many hands make light work, and in what 
Bobolink called a “jiffy” there came plenty of 
wood of all kinds, from dead branches to small- 
sized logs. 

Jud, like every true scout, knew just how to go 
about starting a fire. True, the recent rain had 
wet pretty much all of the wood, so that a tender- 
foot would have had a difficult task getting the 
blaze started, though after that trouble had been 
surmounted it would not be so bad. But Jud 
knew just how to split open a log, and find the 
dry heart that would take fire easily; and in a 
brief time he had his blaze springing up. 


104 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


Then others began to bring some of the things 
ashore, particularly the tents, in which they ex- 
pected to sleep during their stay. 

Most of the boys were deeply impressed by the 
size of both the lake and the island; since they 
had not dreamed that things would be upon such 
a large scale. 

Then there was that strange silence, broken 
only by the constant murmur of the water pass- 
ing out, where the Radway River had its source; 
and perhaps, when a dry spell lowered the water 
of the lake, even this might not be heard. 

It seemed to some of the scouts as though they 
were isolated from all the rest of the world, ma- 
rooned in a desolate region, and with many miles 
between themselves and other human beings. 

However, when the white tents began to go up, 
as the several squads of workers took hold in 
earnest, things began to look more cheerful. 
There is nothing that chases away the “ blues ” 
quicker than a cheerful fire, and the sight of 
“ homey tents. 

“ In the morning, if we feel like it, we can put 
up a flagstaff in front, and fly not only our ban- 
ner, but Old Glory as well,” Paul observed. “ And 
now, suppose some of you fellows give me a hand 
here.” 

“What you going to do, Paul?” asked Old 
Dan Tucker, eagerly. 


THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND 105 


“ Begin to get supper,’* came the answer. 

“ I’ll give you a hand there,” said the other. 

“ Me too,” said Nat Smith, who was a clever 
cook. 

And when the odor of coffee began to steal 
through the camp, the boys felt amply repaid for 
all they had undergone in the rough trip from 
Stanhope. They sniffed the air, and smiled, and 
seemed ready to declare the expedition a great 
success. 

More than that, the cooks being blessed with 
healthy appetites themselves, had cut generous 
slices from one of the fine hams, and these were 
also on the fire, sizzling away at a great rate, and 
throwing off the most tempting odors imagina- 
ble. 

It was a happy sight about that time, and 
showed the best side of camp life. All of the 
boys belonging to the Red Fox Patrol at least, 
had been through the mill before, and knew that 
there was another side to the picture; when the 
rain descended, and the wind blew with hurricane 
force, possibly tearing the canvas out of their 
hands, and leaving them exposed to the storm, 
to be soaked through. 

But of course they hoped nothing of that sort 
was going to happen to them on this trip. Once 
a year ought to be enough. 

If the season of preparation was delightful, 


io6 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


what shall be said of that time when the eighteen 
boys sat around in favorite attitudes, each with a 
cup of steaming coffee beside him, to which he 
could add sugar and condensed milk to suit his 
taste; while on his knees he held a generous-sized 
tin pannikin, upon which was heaped a mess of 
friend potatoes and ham, besides all the bread he 
could dispose of? 

“ This is the stuff ; It’s what I call living ! ” 
Bobolink remarked. 

“You never said truer words.” mumbled Old 
Dan Tucker, who was about as busy as a beaver, 
his eyes sparkling with satisfaction. 

“One thing sure!” declared Spider; “when 
Dan stops eating, he’ll quit living.” 

“Huh! guess all of us will,” added Curly Bax- 
ter. 

They were In no hurry to finish the feast; and 
when the end did arrive. It would take a micro- 
scope to discover any crumbs left over. 

“The worst is yet to come,” announced Jud, 
“ and that’s washing up.” 

But all these things had been arranged for be- 
forehand, so that in due course of time every 
fellow would have his share of camp duties. To- 
day he might have to assist in the cooking; to- 
morrow help wash dishes; the next day be one 
of the wood-getters; and then perhaps on the 


THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND 107 

fourth blissful day, he would be at liberty to just 
loaf I 

And no doubt that last day was the one most 
of them would be apt to enjoy above all else; 
for otherwise they would hardly have been flesh 
and blood boys. 

While those whose duty lay in cleaning up 
after the meal were engaged, some of the others 
joined Paul in bringing the blankets ashore, and 
distributing them to the various tents. 

There were three of the latter, which would 
allow of six boys to each, perhaps a rather “ full 
house ” — but then they could curl up and not take 
much room. 

“ Aren’t we going to keep any watch, Paul ? ” 
asked Joe Clausin, when later on some of the 
more tired talked of turning in. 

“Watch for what?” demanded Bobolink. 

“ Guess Joe thinks Ted Slavin and his crowd 
might get over here, and throw stones at our 
tents, like they did once before,” suggested 
Nuthin. 

“ Well, they do say there’s a wild man around 
here,” declared Joe, in a half hesitating way; 
for he was actually ashamed to expose his belief 
in supernatural things for fear of being laughed 
at. 

“Let Mr. Wild Man come around; who 
cares?” sang out Bobolink. “Why, the circuses 


io8 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


are always wantin’ wild men, you know; and I 
guess we’d get a pretty hefty sum now, if we 
could capture this wonderful critter that’s been 
living here so long covered with the skins of wild 
beasts he’s ate up. It’s me to hit the rubber pil- 
low I fetched along. And Joe, if you want to 
watch, nobody is going to keep you from doing 
it.” 

And with these words Bobolink dodged into 
the tent that he knew his mess belonged to; in 
which action he was followed by numerous other 
scouts. Joe, finding himself left in the lurch, 
cast a fearful glance around at the heavy growth 
of timber on one side the camp, the lake being on 
the other; after which he shook his head as 
though the prospect of sitting there by the dying 
fire did not appeal very much to him — and crawled 
under the flap, too. 

Perhaps it could hardly be said that silence 
rested on the scene; for with a dozen and a half 
boys trying to get to sleep there is always more 
or less horseplay. But an hour later, something 
like quiet settled down. The fire was dying out, 
too, since they had no reason for keeping it going, 
the night air being balmy. 

Midnight came and went, and it must have 
been toward two o’clock in the morning when 
every boy suddenly sat upright, as though a gal- 
vanic shock had passed in and out of every tent. 


THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND 109 


So It had, for the very earth trembled under 
them, as a terrific detonation sounded, just as 
though a bolt of lightning had struck a nearby 
tree. And some of the scouts were ready to de- 
clare that the shock had been accompanied by 
a brilliant electric flash, that almost blinded them. 

Immediately there began to be an upheaval, as 
blankets were tossed aside and the scouts crawled 
or scrambled from under, uttering all sorts of 
exclamations, and apparently too dazed to ac- 
count for the phenomenon. 

They began to swarm out of the tents, and 
loud were the outcries of astonishment when they 
discovered not a cloud as big as a hand In the 
starry heavens. 


CHAPTER XII 


WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? 

“Who hit me?” exclaimed Bobolink, rubbing 
his eyes as he gained his feet and looked around 
at the dimly-seen forms of the other scouts; for 
the moon had by now sunk behind the horizon. 

“What busted?” demanded Nuthin. “I bet 
it was that bottle of raspberry vinegar my sister 
put in my knapsack. It’s gone sour, and exploded, 
sure as anything.” 

Strange to say, none of the others even both- 
ered laughing at such a foolish remark as this. 
They stared at the clear sky overhead, and the 
twinkling stars looking down upon them, just as 
though winking to each other, and enjoying the 
confusion of the valiant scouts. 

Even Paul, who generally knew everything, 
seemed mystified. 

“I declare if I can tell what it was,” he said 
upon being appealed to by some of the others in 
the group. “ I was sound asleep, like the rest 
of you, when all of a sudden it seemed as if the 
end of the world had come. I felt the ground 
no 


WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? 


Ill 


shake under me and as I opened my eyes it seemed 
as if I was nearly blinded. The flash came and 
went just like lightning, and that bang was what 
would pass for thunder in a storm; but for the 
life of me I can’t see any sign of trouble up there.” 

“And we don’t hear anything more; do we?” 
demanded Jud. 

“ Sounded like a big cannon to me,” remarked 
Jack. 

“ Couldn’t be that the State troops are out, 
and having manoeuvres, with a sham battle, could 
it?” questioned Gusty Bellows. 

“Well, hardly, without somebody knowing 
about it. And they generally take up that sort 
of thing later in the year. There’s only one ex- 
planation that sounds a bit reasonable to me,” 
Paul went on. 

“ Tell us what that is, then? ” asked Bobolink. 

“ I’ve heard about meteors falling, and ex- 
ploding when they hit the earth,” the scout mas- 
ter went on to say. 

“That’s right! ” echoed Jack; “ and say, they’re 
always accompanied by a dazzling light, as they 
shoot through space, burning the air along with 
them. Yes, siree, that must have been a big 
meteor stone.” 

“Then it struck the earth right close to our 
camp, mark me,” vowed Jud. 

“ Ain’t I glad it didn’t pick out this spot to drop 


1 12 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


on,” crowed Nuthin. “Whew! guess we’d have 
been squashed flatter than that pancake you hear 
about.” 

“What are meteors made up of — they drop 
from stars; don’t they?” asked Bob Tice. 

“Oh! there’s just millions and billions of ’em 
flying around loose,” said Phil Towns, who liked 
to read of astronomy at times. “ Lots of ’em 
happen to get caught in the envelope of air that 
surrounds the earth. Then they fall victims to 
the force of gravitation, and come plunging down 
at such speed that they do really burn the air, 
just like Jack said. You see, they’re made up 
for the most part of metals, and our old earth 
draws ’em like a monster magnet.” 

“Is that what shooting stars are?” Bob went 
on to ask. 

“ Why, yes, they’re really small meteors. We 
often pass through a mess of ’em. I’ve counted 
hundreds in a single night,” Phil continued, al- 
ways willing to give any information he could 
along his favorite study. 

“Well, they say lightning don’t strike in the 
same place twice; and that goes with your old 
buzzing meteors too, I reckon; so what’s the 
use in our staying up any longer?” remarked 
Bobolink, who seemed quite satisfied with the 
explanation Paul had given of the queer noise, 
and the flash of brilliant light. 


WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? 


113 

So they crawled back into their snug nests, 
and tried to compose themselves for sleep. But 
it is extremely doubtful whether a single one of 
those eighteen boys secured so much as a decent 
cat-nap between that hour and dawn. 

Despite their apparent belief in the explana- 
tion of the phenomenon advanced by Paul, the 
boys could not get rid of the notion that that 
tremendous crash had something to do with the 
strange things told about the haunted island, and 
which helped to give it its bad name. 

They were up pretty early, too. The first 
birds were beginning to chirp in the brush when 
figures came crawling out of the tents, with a great 
stretching of arms, and long yawns. 

Then the lake tempted many of the boys, and 
a great splashing announced that those who could 
swim were enjoying a morning dip while others 
were taking a lesson in learning the first rudiments 
in the art; for Paul wanted every scout in Stan- 
hope Troop to be able to swim and dive before 
the Fall came on. 

The scout master himself watched the proceed- 
ings, hardly able to get his own dip because of 
his anxiety concerning those who, for the time 
being, had been placed in his charge. 

This thing of being responsible for seventeen 
lively boys is not all that it may be cracked up to 
be; especially if the acting scout master is a con- 


1 14 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

sdentlous chap, alive to his duties. Paul felt 
the weight of the load; but he did not shrink. 

Breakfast was presently under way, and no- 
body found any fault when Bobolink announced 
that he meant to instruct Nat Smith and another 
boy just how to go about making those delicious 
flapjacks for which he himself had become fa- 
mous. 

In the cooking contests, at the time the Stan- 
hope Troop carried off their banner in compe- 
tition with the troops of Manchester and Aldine, 
Bobolink had easily outclassed all rivals when it 
came to the science of camp cookery, and his 
flapjacks were admitted without a peer, so that 
ever since, when the boys had an outing, there 
was always a shout when it was found that Bobo- 
link was willing to get a mess of cakes ready for 
their attention. 

Although most of the boys had looked a bit 
peaked, and even haggard, when they first issued 
from the tents, this had long since vanished. The 
frolic in the cool water, and now this feast in the 
open, proved the finest tonics possible. 

They were now filled with new energy and 
pluck. Nobody dreamed of being frightened 
away from camp by such a little thing as a meteor 
bursting near by, or any other strange happening. 
Perhaps, when night came around again, this 
buoyant feeling might take wings, and fly away; 


WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? 115 

but then, there would be fourteen and more hours 
before darkness again assailed them, and what 
was the use fretting over things so far removed? 

All had made up their minds to do a lot of 
things while up at camp, according to their various 
tastes. One began to look around for subjects 
he could take snapshots of, having a liking for 
photography. Another got a companion to take 
up a station along the shore, so that they could 
exchange messages, using the flags and the code. 

Then there were several who evinced a decided 
interest in finding the tracks of wild animals, like 
a raccoon, or a rabbit, or even a squirrel, when 
nothing better presented itself. These they min- 
utely examined, and applied all sorts of theories in 
forming the story of the trail. In many cases 
these proved very entertaining indeed, and Paul 
was always pleaseid, with Jack’s assistance, to 
pass on such things, being adapted through prac- 
tical experience to correct errors, and set the 
beginner straight on certain facts that he had 
mixed. 

There were numerous other things to do also. 
One boy loved to hunt wild flowers, and as soon 
as he could coax a mate to accompany him, since 
Paul would not allow the scouts to go off alone, 
he busied himself in the undergrowth, looking in 
mossy spots for some of the shy blossoms that 
appealed to his collecting taste. 


Ii6 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


Another seemed to have a love for geology. 
He wanted to find specimens of every sort of 
stone, and hinted of certain stories of mining hav- 
ing been carried on in these regions a century or 
two ago. But as he did not find any ore that 
contained precious minerals in paying quantities, 
during their stay on Cedar Island, the chances 
are that his father will still have to go right along 
paying his bills, even after he gets into college 
later in life. 

The morning was slipping away fast, and they 
had not found any better place to settle on for a 
camp. It seemed that, by the merest chance, they 
had hit upon the best spot for a short stay on 
the island. 

Three of the boys wandered along- the shore, 
fishing. Paul had seen them pull in several good- 
sized bass, and began to make up his mind that 
after all they were going to have a fish dinner, 
if the luck held. He was even debating whether 
he dared leave camp for a while, and taking his 
jointed rod, joined the trio who had wandered 
around the bend of the eastern shore of the island; 
for Paul certainly did love to feel a lively fish 
at the end of his line, and could not think of leav- 
ing Lake Tokala without giving its finny inhabi- 
tants a chance to get acquainted with him. 

Just as he had about decided that he could be 
spared for the hour that still remained until noon, 


WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR? 117 

Paul thought he heard a shout. Now, the scouts 
had more than a few times given tongue during 
the morning, when engaged in some boisterous 
game; but it struck Paul, whose nerves were al- 
ways on the alert for such things, while this re- 
sponsibility rested on his shoulders, that there was 
certainly a note, as of alarm, about this particular 
outcry. 

It seemed to come from around that bend, too, 
vvhere he had seen the three boys disappear. Even 
as he looked in that direction, he saw something 
come in sight among the rocks that lay so thickly 
around. It was Gusty Bellows, one of the ang- 
lers; yes, and there was Little Billie just behind 
him, taking great leaps that promised to speedily 
leave the other far in the lurch. 

Paul’s heart seemed to stand still. Where was 
Jud, who had been in the company of the two? 
What could have happened? 

The scout master dropped his rod, which he 
had been in the act of jointing, and started on a 
run to meet the two fishermen; for he could hear 
them shouting, though unable to distinguish just 
what they were saying. 


CHAPTER XIII 


THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND 

Then Paul felt a sensation of sudden relief 
pass over him. He had discovered a third figure 
running, some distance In the rear of the other 
scouts ; and when he recognized this as Jud Elder- 
kin, he knew that whatever might have happened 
to frighten the fishermen, at least none of them 
seemed to be In any Immediate danger. 

Of course, by this time scouts were springing 
up all around, and all heading toward the common 
centre, which would be where Paul and the fish- 
ermen must meet. 

Little Billie was the first one to arrive, for, 
being possessed of long legs. In spite of his name, 
he could get over ground at a prodigious rate, 
given cause. And judging from his ashen face, 
he had plenty of that right now. 

“What is It?” demanded Paul, as the other 
came panting along. 

“ Wild man ! ” gasped Little Billie. 

“ Whee I ” exclaimed Bobolink, who had man- 
aged to get near enough to catch what was said. 

ii8 


THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND 119 

“ ’Fraid he nabbed poor Jud I ” said Gusty, now 
reaching the spot, and just about at his last gasp. 

“Not much he didn’t, because there he comes 
now I ” ejaculated Bobolink. 

“ Oh I mercy ! ” exclaimed Little Billie, evi- 
dently thinking he meant the wild man. 

“It’s Jud, and all to the good; but even he 
looks white around the gills, too, Paul. They 
must have seen something, to give ’em all such a 
scare,” Bobolink went on to say. 

“You just bet we did; ask Jud!” declared 
Gusty, just as though he imagined the others might 
question their veracity, but would believe the pa- 
trol leader, who was now coming along with great 
leaps and bounds. 

And presently Jud Elderkin halted at the group. 
He looked first at Gusty, and then at Little Billie. 
There was a question in his eye. 

“Sure, we saw it, too, Jud!” declared Gusty, 
holding up his quivering hand just as though he 
were in the witness box; but then, as his father 
was a lawyer, possibly Gusty often experimented 
on himself, since he meant to either take up the 
same pursuit in life, or give his magnificent voice 
a chance to earn him a living in the role of an 
auctioneer. 

“ Me too ; and say, wasn’t it a terror, though? ” 
the tall scout declared. 

“ Well, I didn’t wait long enough to have any 


120 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


words with the Thing,” admitted Jud. “ You see, 
I happened to be further away from home than 
the Other fellows, and I knew I’d have more space 
to cover. So, after letting out a yell to sort of 
warn ’em, why I just put for cover. Never ran 
faster even between bases. Thought he’d get me 
sure before I rounded that bend; but when I 
looked back, blessed if he wasn’t grabbin’ up our 
strings of fish like fun, and making off with ’em. 
I don’t know right now whether I’m just scared, 
or only boiling mad. Tell me, somebody! ” 

“ A little of both, I guess 1 ” declared Bobo- 
link, grinning. 

“ Say, then, it wasn’t just a big yarn about that 
wild man, after all; was it?” said Tom Betts. 

“How about that, Little Billie; did you see 
him?” demanded Jud. 

“Did I? Think I was runnin’ for my health? 
Why, he looked all of seven feet high to me, and 
covered with long hair. Talk about your Rob- 
inson Crusoe making him a coat of an old nanny 
goat, that feller was in the same class; eh. 
Gusty?” loudly asserted the tall boy. 

“ I saw him, all right, don’t you forget it,” de- 
clared the one addressed. “And I certain sure 
thought he was after me. But if Jud says he 
took our nice string of bass, why that changes 
the thing, and makes me mad as hops. Think 
of us workin’ all that time, only to fill up a crazy 


THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND 121 


crank. Next time I go fishin’ Pm meanin’ to sit 
home, and do it off the door step.’’ 

Paul was revolving many things in his mind 
and trying to understand. 

‘‘ I want several of you to go back with me,” 
he said, presently; “the rest head for camp or 
go about whatever you were doing.” 

“Want to take a squint at his tracks; eh, 
Paul? ” asked Jud. 

“No harm done if we do,” remarked Bobo- 
link, thus declaring his intention of being one of 
those who were to accompany the leader. 

Jack also went along, and Jud, making four 
in all ; but the last mentioned refused to budge a 
foot until he had obtained a healthy-looking club, 
which he tucked under his arm. 

“ Now, I want to warn that same critter to 
keep his distance from me,” Jud said, as he led 
off with long strides. “ He gave me one scare, 
and I promise you that if he tries that game again 
there’s going to be a warm time around these 
regions. But I reckon he’s satisfied with all our 
nice fish, and we won’t see anything of him until 
he gets good and hungry again. Wonder if he 
eats ’em raw, Chinese fashion, or has some way 
of making a fire? ” 

“What’s that over yonder?” asked Paul. 

“Where?” gasped Jud, brandishing his club. 

“Looks like a string of fish; and so, you see, 


122 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


the wild man didn’t get all you fellows caught. 
We’ll just pick that lot up, and trot along,” ob- 
served Paul. 

“He got mine, all right; these must have been 
what one of the other fellows had. You see, they 
were so badly rattled they just cut and run, and 
held on to their rods only. Yep, there’s a second 
string of fish, and that accounts for both; but 
you needn’t think mine’ll be laying around, for he 
got ’em. 

“Well, show me just about where he was when 
you saw him last,” Paul demanded. 

Jud could easily do this. They found the print 
of human feet in the earth. It must have been an 
unusually large foot that made the marks; and 
this tallied with what had been said about the 
height of the wild man. 

“ You’re not goin’ to try and follow him, I hope, 
Paul? ” asked Jud, uneasily, as if he drew the line 
at certain things, ready and willing as he might 
be to back the scout master in most ventures. 

“ Oh ! it wouldn’t pay us,” retorted Paul. “ As 
one of the boys said, we haven’t lost any wild man ; 
and so far as I know there’s no one missing 
around Stanhope, so it can’t be some man from 
there. I think we’d do well to mind our own 
business in this affair; don’t you, fellows?” 

“Yes, I do,” replied Jack, “but I was wonder- 


THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND 123 

Ing whether this thing will crop up to give us a 
heap of bother while we’re camping up here.” 

“ How’s that? ” asked Bobolink. “ There’s only 
one thing that gives me any carking care, and you 
know what that is, Jack, old boy. If I only knew 
about those boxes. I’d be so much easier in my 
mind.” 

“Well,” said Paul, “if this crazy man would 
steal our fish, he’d just as lief take anything else 
we’ve got that’s good to eat. When he smells our 
coffee cooking it’ll call up some long-forgotten 
craving for the Java bean; and first thing you 
know he’ll be invading our camp every night, hunt- 
ing around for any old thing he can steal.” 

“Now, I like that,” said Bobolink, satirically. 
“ Nice prospect, ain’t it, not to be able to step 
out of the tent of nights, without bumping noses 
with that awful Man Friday in wild animal 
shows? P’raps in self-defense we may have to 
do that grand capture act after all, Paul.” 

“ Well, there’s nothing more to learn here, so 
we might as well turn back again. As I don’t 
see anything of your string of fish, Jud, I cal- 
culate that he must have gotten away with ’em. 
We can add a few more to these, and have enough 
for a regular feast. Come on, boys, back to camp 
for us.” 

Some way or other it was noticed that during 
the early afternoon most of the boys hung around 


124 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


the camp. It seemed to have an especial attrac- 
tion for them all. One busied himself sorting 
over the collection of the morning in the way of 
plants. A second was polishing up certain speci- 
mens of quartz he had found, after cracking some 
of the round stones that had washed on the island 
during a flood, possibly many years back. A third 
developed his pictures, having brought along his 
daylight tank. 

And so it went, until Paul smiled to observe 
what a busy colony he had in his charge. On his 
part, he took a rod and line, with some bait, and 
went off with Jack to add to the number of fish, 
so that there would be enough for all at suppe 
time. And as the others had fished in one direc- 
tion, Paul and his chum decided to move in the 
other. 

They put in an hour with very fair success, 
considering that it was not the best part of the 
day for fishing. 

Of course, as they walked along, keeping close 
to one another, occasionally Paul and Jack would 
chat on various subjects. They also kept their 
eyes open, not wishing to be taken by surprise, 
should that hairy individual, who seemed to have 
a craving for fish, rush out at them. 

And more than that, Paul had copied the ex- 
ample set by Jud. It was fashionable about that 
time not to walk forth without a nice little Irish 
shillelah under one’s arm, with which a head 


THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND 125 


could be made to sing unmercifully, in case of 
necessity. 

Paul had just had a pretty lively time with a 
good fish, and had succeeded in bringing his prize 
to land, when he happened to look down at the 
beach on which he was standing. Bobolink and 
Tom Betts were coming along, as though curious 
to see how fast the stock of provisions for supper 
was increasing. 

So Paul bent down to examine something that 
had caught his attention. The other three coming 
up. Jack having joined Bobolink and Tom, found 
the scout master still on his hands and knees. 

“Hello! found something, have you?” asked 
Bobolink. 

“ Mebbe the footprints of the ghost! ” chuckled 
Tom, meaning to be humorous. 

But Jack saw that his chum was very serious; 
and as he dropped down beside Paul, he let his 
eyes fall upon the sand. 

“What’s this, Paul?” he remarked, imme- 
diately. “Looks like the prow of a rowboat had 
been pulled up here — why, that’s a dead certainty, 
because look at the plain prints of boots here, 
and several different kinds, too. Shows that some- 
body landed here on the island; and Paul, it must 
have been after that rain storm, for these marks 
don’t seem to be washed, as they would be if the 
rain had beat down on them. What in the world 


126 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


d’ye suppose It means ? Are there people on this 
queer old Cedar Island? If there are, who can 
they be, and why should they hide from everybody 
like this? ” 

As Jack said this he looked up. Bobolink and 
Tom were staring at the plain marks in the sand, 
with wonderment written on their faces ; and even 
Paul shook his head. 


CHAPTER XIV 


TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT 

“We'll have to look into this thing,” said 
Paul, finally, seeing that his three chums were 
waiting for an opinion from the one they looked 
up to as their leader. 

“ But what I said was pretty close to the truth ; 
wasn’t it, Paul? ” Jack asked. 

“ Every word of it” came the ready response, 
for Paul was always willing to give every fellow 
his meed of praise. “ The only trouble is, it stops 
right where you left off. None of us can say a 
word after that.” 

“How many men were there in the crowd?” 
asked Tom Betts. 

“I could make out four,” replied Jack; “you 
take another look, Paul, and see if that’s correct.” 

“ I know it is,” remarked the scout master, nod- 
ding, “because I counted them before I called 
you. And they seemed to lift something heavy 
from the boat, which they carried away into the 
bushes here.” 

“ Whee ! something heavy, eh ? ” burst out the 

127 


128 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


impetuous Bobolink; “ and they carried it between 
them, two and two; was it, Paul?’’ 

“ Why, yes, two on each side ; if you look close, 
you can see where they stepped into each other’s 
footprints,” assented the patrol leader. 

“That’s so,” agreed Bobolink, after bending 
down hastily; “ just like — er — ^you’ve seen the pall- 
bearers at a funeral!” 

“ Oh ! ” exclaimed Tom, turning a little white at 
the idea. 

“ Of course, that isn’t saying it was a funeral,” 
remarked Bobolink, hastily, as he noticed that 
Paul glanced at Jack, and the two shook their 
heads a trifle, as though the idea failed to impress 
them favorably. “ But whatever it was, they 
seemed to find it heavy, the way their toes dug into 
the sand here.” 

“Yes, it was heavy, all right,” admitted Paul. 
“ I think, from the way the rear men stepped into 
the prints of the one up head, that whatever they 
were carrying could not have been very lengthy; 
in fact, it must have been short, but rather broad.” 

“ Well, that’s a smart idea of yours, Paul, and 
I c’n see how you hit on it,” Bobolink was quick 
to say, with a look of sincere admiration. 

“ But whatever do you reckon would bring four 
men up here to this lonely island, carrying some 
heavy object in a rowboat?” Tom Betts went 
on. 


TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT 129 


“That’s where we have to do our guessing,” 
Paul replied. “We don’t know; and as they 
haven’t been obliging enough to write it out, and 
fasten the card to a tree, why, we’ve just got to 
put on our thinking caps, as my mother would 
say.” 

“Well, we’ve had some experience in the past 
with hoboes ; think they could be a batch of Weary 
Willies, Paul? ” remarked Tom Betts. 

“ I’m not ready to say off-hand that they’re 
not,” replied the other, slowly; “but it hardly 
seems likely. In the first place, every one of them 
seemed to be wearing sound shoes. Did you ever 
know four tramps to do that?” 

“Well, I should say not,” replied Bobolink, 
scornfully. “ It’d be a wonder if one out of four 
had shoes that’d hold on without a lot of rope. 
You clinched that idea the first thing, Paul.” 

“ Then what’d you say they were? ” demanded 
Tom. 

Bobolink rubbed his chin reflectively. 

“ A heap of difference between plain tramps, 
and the kind they call yeggs; isn’t there, Paul?” 
he asked, presently. 

“ Everybody says so,” came the answer. “ Yegg- 
men are supposed to be the toughest members of 
the tramp tribe. They’re really burglars or safe- 
blowers, who pretend to be hoboes so they can 
prowl around country towns, looking up easy snaps 


130 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


about the banks and stores that ought to be good 
picking. And so you think these four men might 
belong to that crowd, do you, Bobolink?” 

“It’s barely possible, anyhow,” the one ad- 
dressed went on, doggedly. “ And I was just try- 
ing to remember if I’d heard of any robbery 
lately. There was a store broke into over at 
Marshall two weeks ago, and the thieves carried 
off a lot of stuff. But seems to me, the men got 
nabbed later on. I’m a little hazy about it, 
though. But supposin’ now, that these four men 
had made a rich haul somewhere, and wanted to 
hide their stuff in a good place, could they find 
a better one than up here on Cedar Island?” 

The other three exchanged glances. 

“ I guess that’s about right,” admitted Tom. 

“ It’s certainly quiet enough to suit anybody; 
and chances are they wouldn’t be disturbed in a 
coon’s age,” declared Jack. “ Our coming here 
was a freak. It mightn’t happen again in many 
years.” 

“And this old island’s already got a bad name; 
hasn’t it?” Bobolink went on. 

“ That would help keep people away,” admitted 
Paul. “ I’ve heard of men coming up in this re- 
gion winters, trapping the muskrats that swarm 
in the marshes; but up to cranberry picking time 
it’s almost deserted.” 


TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT 131 


“Jack, you must have had an idea, too?” re- 
marked Bobolink. 

“Well, I did; but perhaps the rest of you’ll 
only give me the laugh if I mention it,” replied 
Jack. 

“All the same, it isn’t fair to keep anything 
back,” Tom declared. “ My guess didn’t pan out 
much, and you couldn’t have worse luck than 
that. So tell us.” 

“Yes, go on. Jack, and give us the benefit of 
your think-box. I’ve known you to get away up 
head more’n a few times, when it came to a live 
race. And mebbe some of the rest of us mightn’t 
think so badly of your idea as you do yourself,” 
and as he said this Bobolink sat down on the sand 
to listen, all the while eyeing those mysterious 
tracks as though he half expected them to give 
tongue, and tell the true story of their origin. 

“ Oh! well, that seems only fair, so here goes,” 
Jack began. “ Somehow I happened to remem- 
ber that once on a time I read about some coun- 
terfeiters who had their nest in an old haunted 
mill, away up in the country.” 

“ Whee ! ” Bobolink said, sitting bolt upright. 

“None of the country people would ever go 
near the place, you see ; and when a light happened 
to be seen in it at night time, they talked about 
the ghost walking, and all that,” Jack continued. 

“ Huh ! that must have been when the boss was 


132 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


paying off his hands,” chuckled Bobolink. “I 
always heard that was the time the ghost walked.” 

“ In this case the truth was only found out by 
some accident,” Jack went on to say, without pay- 
ing any heed to the interruption. “ I think a 
hunter was overtaken by darkness, having lost 
himself in the woods. He was a stranger, and 
had never heard about the haunted mill. So, 
seeing a light, he went up to ask his way, or if 
he could get a chance of a bed that night, I forget 
which. He saw enough to give him a suspicion; 
and when he did get back to the tavern he was 
stopping at, he sent word to the Government au- 
thorities. A raid resulted, and they caught four 
counterfeiters hard at work.” 

you said. Jack!” echoed Tbm. 

‘‘Yes, just the same number there seems to be 
here; but then that’s only a coincidence, because 
those others are serving ten-year sentences in the 
penitentiary. Now, you see, I guess the fact of 
Cedar Island being said to have a real ghost got 
me into the idea of thinking about that story I 
read in the paper. Of course it’s a silly idea all 
around.” 

“ Well, I don’t know,” said Paul, slowly. 

“ You don’t mean to say you think it might hap- 
pen that way here?” demanded Jack, seeming to 
be the only one desirous of “shooting holes” in 


TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT 133 


the proposition he had himself advanced, as Bobo- 
link expressed it later on. 

“ It’s possible,” Paul said, simply. 

“Huh! for my part,” spoke up Bobolink, “I 
think it’s more than that, even. If you asked me 
straight now. I’d be inclined to say it’s probable.” 

“ Same here,” remarked Tom Betts, eagerly. 

Jack laughed as if pleased. 

“ I declare, I really expected to hear you knock 
my idea all to flinders,” he remarked. 

“ But what under the sun could they be carrying 
in that big box?” asked Tom Betts. 

“ Box 1 ” muttered Bobolink, frowning, as 
though the word recalled to his mind a matter 
that had been puzzling him greatly of late; but 
he did not think to say anything further on that 
subject. 

“Well, sometimes machinery comes that way,” 
suggested Paul. “ If these strange men did turn 
out to be what Jack said, they might be getting 
a press of some kind up here, to do their printing 
with. I never saw an outfit, but seems to me they 
must have such a thing, to make the bogus bills.” 

“That’s right,” added Tom. “I read all 
about it not long ago. Wallace Carberry’s so 
interested in everything about books and printing, 
that he clips all sorts of articles. And this one 
described a kind of press that had been taken in 
a raid on some bogus money-makers. Yep, it 


134 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


must have been machinery they were lugging off 
here. Whew! just to think of us bein’ mixed up 
in such a business. I wonder, now, if the Gov- 
ernment ever pays a reward for information about 
such things.” 

“ Oh ! rats I that’s the last thing a scout should 
bother his head about,” said Bobolink, scornfully. 
“ He ought to see his duty, and do it. Though, of 
course, if a nice little present happens along after- 
wards, why, I guess there’s no law against a scout 
acceptin’ it; eh, Paul?” 

“ Certainly not,” replied the other, “ you’ve got 
the idea down pretty fine, Bobolink. But let’s see 
if we can guess anything else. Then we’d better 
go back to camp, and start the rest of the fellows 
thinking about it. Perhaps Jud or Andy or Nuthin 
might dig up something that never occurred to any 
of us.” 

But although they talked it over for some little 
time they did not seem able to conjure up any new 
idea; everything advanced proved to hinge upon 
one of the explanations already spoken of. And 
in the end they were forced to admit that they had 
.apparently exhausted the subject. 

“Let’s pick up our fish, and stroll back, fel- 
lows,” proposed Paul, finally. 

“ Lucky to have any fish, with that hog around,” 
remarked Bobolink. 


TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT 135 

“Now you’re meaning the wild man, I take it? ” 
said Jack. 

“No other; the fellow that drops in on you 
when you ain’t expectin’ company, and just swipes 
your string of fish like he did Jud’s. I might ’a 
thought Jud was giving us a yarn to explain why 
he didn’t have anything to show for his morning’s 
work; but both Little Billie and Gusty saw the 
same thing. Say, that’s another link we got to 
straighten out. What’s a crazy man doing up 
here ; and is he in the same bunch that made these 
tracks?” 

“That’s something we don’t know,” admitted 
Paul. 

“ But we mean to find out,” asserted Bobolink, 
with a determined snapping of his jaws. 

“ Perhaps so — anyhow, we’ll make a brave try 
for it,” Paul declared. 

“ He wasn’t one of these four, that’s flat,” said 
Tom Betts. “ We all saw what a big foot the 
wild man had; and besides, he goes without shoes.” 

“Glad to see you noticed all that,” commented 
Paul, who always felt pleased when any of the 
troop exhibited powers of observation, since it 
proved that the lessons he was endeavoring to 
impress upon their minds had taken root. 

They turned their faces toward the camp, and 
Paul made sure to pick up the fish he and Jack 
had caught. 


136 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


With what weVe already cleaned, they’ll make 
a fine mess for the crowd,” he remarked, pointing 
out an unusually big fellow that had given him all 
the fun he wanted, before consenting to be dragged 
ashore. 

“ I notice that you both kill your fish as you 
get ’em,” remarked Tom. 

“ I wouldn’t think of doing anything else,” re- 
plied Jack. “It only takes a smart rap with a 
club on the head to end their sufferings. I’d hate 
to think of even a fish dying by inches, and flap- 
ping all over the boat or the ground, as it gasps 
its life away. That’s one of the things scouts 
are taught — to be humane sportsmen, giving the 
game a chance, whether fish, flesh or fowl, and 
not inflicting any unnecessary suffering.” 

“ Wonder if anything’s happened in camp since 
we came away; because Bobolink and I have been 
gone nearly an hour,” remarked Tom Betts, to 
change the subject; for his conscience reproved 
him with regard to the matter Jack was speaking 
about. 

“What makes you think that?” asked Paul, 
suspiciously. 

“Oh! nothing; only things seem to be on the 
jump with us right now; and a fellow can’t turn 
around without bumping into a wild man, or some 
bogus money-makers, it seems. P’raps the 
ghost’ll show up next. Listen I wasn’t that some- 


TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT 137 

body trying to blow your bugle, Bobolink, that 
you left hung up in the tent?** 

“ It sure was, for a fact. Let*s start on a run, 
fellows. Mebbe they*ve gone and grabbed that 
wild man! P*raps he was bent on carryin’ off 
the whole outfit this time. You never can tell 
what a crazy man*ll do next; that*s the hard part 
of being a keeper in a queer house, where they 
keep a lot of that kind; anyhow a man told me 
that once who*d been there. But listen to that 
scout trying to sound the recall, would you? 
Whoop her up, boys; there’s something happened, 
as sure as you live ! ** 


CHAPTER XV 


ORDERED OFF 

It was about four o’clock In the afternoon of 
this, the first day of their intended stay on Cedar 
Island, when Paul and his three comrades came 
running around the bend of the shore above the 
camp, and saw some of the scouts beckoning 
wildly to them. 

“They’ve gone and grabbed him, sure as shoot- 
ing I” gasped Bobolink, exultantly. 

But Jack and Paul noted that while there 
seemed to be a cluster of the boys no strange form 
could be seen among them. In fact, they appeared 
to be greatly excited over something Jud Elder- 
kin was holding. 

And in this manner then did the quartette reach 
the camp. 

“Where is he; got him tied up good and 
hard?” demanded Bobolink, speaking with diffi- 
culty, from lack of breath. 

Nobody paid the slightest attention to what he 
was saying; and so Bobolink, happening to notice 
that it was Curly Baxter who had been taking 
138 


ORDERED OFF 


139 


liberties with his precious bugle, quietly possessed 
himself of it, and examined it carefully, to make 
sure that it had not been dented. 

“Take a look at this, Paul,” said Jud, as he 
held out the fluttering piece of paper that had 
evidently caused all the excitement. 

Written upon this the scout master saw only a 
few words, but they possessed considerable sig- 
nificance, when viewed in the light of the strange 
happenings of the recent past. 

Leave this island at once!*^ 

Just five words in all. Whoever wrote that 
order must be a man who did not believe in wast- 
ing anything. There was no penalty attached, and 
they were at liberty to believe anything they chose; 
just the plain command to get out, and somehow it 
seemed more impressive because of its brevity. 

Paul looked at Jack, and then around at the 
anxious faces of the other scouts. He saw only 
blank ignorance there. Nobody could imagine 
what this strange order meant. The island might 
have an owner, but at the best it was only a worth- 
less bit of property, and their camping on its shore 
for a week could not be considered in the light 
of trespass. 

“ Where did you get this, Jud ? ” asked the scout 
master. 

“ Why, Old Dan Tucker brought it to me,” re- 
plied the leader of the Gray Fox Patrol, promptly. 


140 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


“And where did you find it, Dan?’* continued 
Paul, turning on the scout in question, who seemed 
only too willing to tell all he knew: — which, it 
turned out, was .precious little at best. 

“Why, you see, I had a dispute with Nuthin 
about the number of hams fetched on the trip. 
He vowed there was two, and I said three, countin’ 
the one we’d cut into last night. So to prove it, 
I just happened to step into the tent where we’ve 
got some of the grub piled up. It was three, all 
right, just as I said. But I found this paper 
pinned to one of the whole hams, which, you know, 
are sewed up in covers right from the packers. 
I couldn’t make out what it meant. First I 
thought Nuthin was playin’ a joke on me; but he 
denied it. So I took the paper to Jud, seein’ that 
you were away, Paul.” 

“It was pinned to one of the hams, was it?” 
asked the scout master, frowning. 

“Sure, and the pin’s still stickin’ in it,” an- 
swered Dan, positively. 

Paul looked around. 

“I want to settle one thing right at the start, 
before we bother any more about this matter,” 
he remarked. “ Did any one of you write this, 
or have you ever seen it before Dan brought it 
to Jud?” 

“ He showed it to me,” exclaimed Nuthin; “but 


ORDERED OFF 


141 

it was the first time I ever glimpsed that paper 
or writin’, Paul, I give you my word.” 

“ If anybody else has seen it before, I want him 
to hold up his hand,” continued the scout master, 
knowing how prone boys are to play pranks. 

The boys glanced at each other; but not a single 
hand went up. 

“Well, that settles one thing, then,” declared 
Paul. “This note came from some one not be- 
longing to our camp. He must have crawled into 
the tent from the rear, taking advantage of our 
being busy. Yes, there’s a bunch of scrub close 
enough to give him more or less shelter, if he 
crawled on all fours. Let’s see if one or two of 
the tent pins haven’t been drawn up.” 

Followed by the rest, Paul strode over to the 
tent where a quantity of the provisions were kept. 
Entering this, he quickly saw that it was exactly 
as he had suggested. Three of the tent pins, 
which the boys had pounded down with the camp 
axe, had been pulled up, and this slack allowed 
the intruder to crawl under the now loose canvas. 

“ I can see the place he shuffled along, and 
where his toes dug into the earth,” declared Jack, 
as he bent over. 

“We’ll try and follow it up presently, and see 
where he got on his feet to move off,” Paul re- 
marked. “I’d like to find out whether his shoes 


142 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


make a mark anything like same of those we were 
looking at up the shore, Jack.” 

“Whew I” exclaimed Bobolink, who was again 
deeply interested in what was going on, since 
he had found his precious bugle unharmed. 

“Let’s look at that paper again,” resumed 
Paul. “The writing was done with a fountain 
pen, I should say. That seems to tell that the 
owner was no common hobo. And the writing 
is as clear as the print in our copybooks at school. 
The man who did that was a penman, believe me. 
‘Leave this island at once 1’ Just like that, short 
and crisp. Not a threat about what will happen 
if we don’t, you see ; we’re expected to just imag- 
ine all sorts of terrible things, unless we skip out 
right away. One thing sure, Jud, your wild man 
never wrote that note, or even pinned it on our 
ham, because the crawler wore shoes.” 

“That’s right,” muttered Jud, his face betray- 
ing the admiration he felt for the scout master 
who knew so well how to patch things together, 
so that they seemed to be almost as plain as print. 

“Now, the rest of you just stay around while 
I take Jack and Bobolink with me along this trail. 
We want to settle one thing, and that’ll come 
when we hit the place where this party got up on 
his feet to move ofE.” 

So saying, Paul himself got down and deliber- 
ately crawled under the canvas the same way the 


ORDERED OFF 


143 


trespasser had. Jack and Bobolink hastened to 
follow his example, only too well pleased to be 
selected to accompany the leader. 

It was no great task to follow the marks made 
by the crawling man. His toes had dug into the 
soil, going and coming, for apparently he had 
used the same trail both ways. 

“Here we are, boys; now, take a lookl” said 
Paul, presently. 

They were by this time in the midst of the 
timber with which this end of the island was cov- 
ered. Glimpses of the tents could be seen be- 
tween the trees; but any intruder might feel him- 
self reasonably justified in rising to his full height 
when he had made a point so well screened from 
inquisitive eyes. 

This man had done so, at any rate. The plain 
print of his shoes was visible in a number of 
places. Both Jack and Bobolink gave utterance 
to exclamations as soon as they saw these. 

“ One of the four, that’s dead sure ! ” the for- 
mer declared, positively. 

“I’ll be badgered if it ain’t!” muttered Bobo- 
link, staring at the tracks. 

“So you see, we’ve settled one thing right at 
the start,” said Paul. 

“That’s what we have,” observed Bobolink. 
“It’s those fellows who carried the heavy load 
from the rowboat, after landin’ on the island, 


144 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


after the rain storm, that want our room more’n 
our company. The nerve of that bunch to tell 
us to clear out, when chances are weVe got just 
as much right here as they have — p’raps a heap 
sight more.” 

“That doesn’t sound much like you wanted to 
make a change of base, Bobolink?” remarked 
Paul, smiling. 

“No more do I,” quickly replied the other. 
“I’m not used to bein’ ordered around as if I was 
a slave. What if there are four of them, aren’t 
eighteen husky scouts equal to such a crowd? No, 
siree, if you left it to me. I’d say stick it out till the 
last horn blows. Give ’em the defi right from the 
shoulder. Tell ’em to go hang, for all we care. 
We c’n take care of ourselves, mebbe; and mind 
our own business in the bargain.” 

“ But it’s something else that makes you want 
to stay?” Paul suggested. 

“How well you know my cut, Paul,” declared 
the other. “You reckon I never can stand a mys- 
tery. It gets on my nerves, keeps me awake 
nights, and plays hob with my think-box all the 
time. Now, there was those boxes — but I guess 
I’ll try and forget all about that matter now, be- 
cause we’ve got a sure enough puzzle to solve 
right on our hands. Who are these four men; 
what are they hiding on Cedar Island for; why 
should they want to chase us away if they weren’t 


ORDERED OFF 


145 

afraid we*d find out somethin* they’re a-doin’ 
here, that ain’t just accordin’ to the law?” 

“You’ve got it pretty straight, Bobolink,” ad- 
mitted Paul. “But since we’ve learned all we 
wanted to find out, suppose we go back to the 
rest of the boys. We must talk this thing over, 
and decide what’s to be done.” 

“Do you mean about skipping out, Paul?” 
Bobolink exclaimed. “ Oh ! I hope now, you won’t 
do anything like that. Pd feel dreadfully mean 
to sneak away. Always did hate to see a cur dog 
do that, with his tail between his legs.” 

“ Still, it might seem best to leave here by 
dark,” said Paul. 

Something in his manner gave Jack a clue as 
to the meaning back of these words. He knew 
the scout master better than did any other fellow 
in the troop, and was accustomed to reading his 
motives in his look or manner. 

“ I take it that means we might pretend to clear 
out, and come back under cover of the night, to 
make another camp; eh, Paul?” Jack now re- 
marked, insinuatingly. 

“ That was what I had in mind,” admitted the 
other; “but of course it’ll be up to the boys to 
settle such a question. I believe in every fellow 
having a voice in things that have to do with the 
general business of the camp. But majority rules 


146 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

when once the vote is taken — stay, or go for 
good.” 

“ Glad to hear you say so,” ventured Bobolink. 
“ Because here’s three votes that will be cast for 
sticking it out; and if I know anything about Jud 
and Nuthin anci Bluff, together with several more, 
the majority will want to stick. But I mean to 
give them a hint that we think that way. Several 
weak-kneed brothers are always ready to vote the 
way the leaders do. When the scout master takes 
snuff they start to sneezing right away.” 

“And for that very reason. Bobolink, I don’t 
want you to say a word in advance to any of the 
fellows. When we have a vote, it should be the 
free opinion of every scout, without his being in- 
fluenced by another. But what do you think of 
the idea, Jack?” 

“I think it’s just great,” answered his chum. 
“And by the way, if we should conclude to come 
back to the island again in the night, I know the 
finest kind of a place where we could hide the 
motorboats.” 

“Where is that?” asked the scout master, 
quickly. 

“You haven’t been around on the side of the 
island where the shore curves into a little bay, 
like. The trees grow so close that their branches 
overhang the water. If the boats were left in 
there, and some green stuff drawn around them, 


ORDERED OFF 


147 


I don’t believe they’d ever be noticed, unless some 
one was hunting every foot of the island over for 
them.” 

“Yes, I think I know where you mean,” said 
Paul. “ I wasn’t down by the little inlet you 
speak of; but back on the shore there’s a dandy 
place among the rocks and trees, where we could 
pitch a new camp, and keep pretty well hidden, 
unless we happened to make a lot of noise, which 
we won’t do if we can help it. But everything 
depends on how the boys look at it.” 

“Anyhow,” said Bobolink, resolutely; “I feel 
that we ought to put it up to them that way ; tell 
’em how easy it will be to screen the boats, and 
have a hidden camp. You’ll let me tell about that, 
Paul, I hope, even if I mustn’t say you mean to 
vote to come back?” 

“ I suppose that would be fair enough, because 
we ought to hold up our side of the question,” the 
scout master replied, as they drew near the place 
where the three tents stood, and several groups 
of chattering scouts could be seen, doubtless earn- 
estly discussing this mysterious thing that had 
come about; for, of course, Tom Betts had al- 
ready told all about the suspicious tracks of the 
four men who had carried a heavy burden into 
the brush. 

They looked eagerly toward the advancing 


148 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


three, as though expecting that Paul would now 
take them fully into his confidence. 

This he proceeded to do without further delay; 
and it was worth while observing the various 
shades of emotion that flitted across the faces of 
the listeners while the scout master was talking. 
Some seemed alarmed, others disposed to be pro* 
voked, while not a few. Bobolink noted with se- 
cret glee, allowed a frown to mark their fore- 
heads, as though they were growing angry at being 
so summarily ordered off the island by these un- 
known men, who did not even have the decency 
to present their command of dismissal in person. 

He knew these fellows could be counted on to 
vote the right way when the question came up as 
to what they should do. 

When the entire thing had been explained, so 
that they all understood it, Paul asked for a vote 
as to whether they clear out altogether, or appear 
to do so, only to come back again. 

And, just as the sanguine Bobolink had ex- 
pected, it resulted in thirteen declaring it to be 
their idea that they should come back, and try 
to find out what all these queer goings-on meant. 
When the result of the vote was made known, 
even the five who had voted to go moved that it 
be made unanimous. 

Perhaps they came to the conclusion that since 
a return was decided on it would be safer to be 


ORDERED OFF 


149 


with the rest on the haunted island, than oif by 
themselves in a lone tent on the distant shore, 
where no assistance could reach them. 

“Well, we’d better have an early supper, then, 
and get away; or since it is getting dark now, per- 
haps we’ll have to put off the eating part until 
later,” Paul suggested. 

“Any old time will do for that,” declared Bobo- 
link, carelessly, whereupon Old Dan Tucker gave 
him a look of dismay, and sadly shook his head, 
as though he did not indorse such a foolish the- 
ory at all. 

So, when the others were carrying things to the 
boats, and showing considerable nervousness while 
doing it. Old Dan managed to fill his pockets with 
crackers, which he hoped might stave off starva- 
tion for a little while at least. 

Acting on the suggestion of Jack, the scouts 
gave all sorts of exhibitions of alarm as they 
busied themselves taking down the tents, and load- 
ing their traps aboard the two motorboats. Every 
now and then one of them would point somewhere 
up or down the shore, as though he thought he 
saw signs of the enemy coming, whereupon a knot 
of the boys would gather, and stare, and then scat- 
ter, to work more feverishly than ever. 

They really enjoyed acting the part, too. It 
seemed to appeal to their fondness for a joke. And 
the best of *t was, they always fancied that some- 


150 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


where or other at least one pair of hostile eyes 
must be observing these signs of panic with satis- 
faction. 

Just as darkness began to creep over water and 
island, clouds shutting out the moonlight again, 
all was pronounced ready. And then the cheery 
“ chug’’ of the motors sounded, for the boys pur- 
posely made all the noise Jjhey could, under the 
impression that it might seem to add to the ap- 
pearance of a hasty flight. 

In this manner did the troop of scouts break 
camp before they had been on Cedar Island more 
than twenty-four hours ; and, so far as appearances 
went, deserted the place of the evil name for good 
and all. 


CHAPTER XVI 


UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS 

Paul had settled it all in his mind as to what 
their course should be. He drew a mental map 
of the island, and its surroundings; and also re- 
membered certain conclusions he had previously 
entertained connected with the depth of water on 
all sides, between their late camp and the main- 
land. 

So the Comfort set the pace, which was not very 
fast; for they wanted darkness to settle fully over 
the lake, in order that they might move around 
without being seen from the island. 

“Tell me when the island is out of sight, Jud,” 
remarked Paul ; for some of the time the two boats 
were side by side, and nothing interfered with 
a clear view in the rear. 

“Why, it’s swallowed up already in the night 
mist; I can just make out that old cedar that stands 
on top of the little hill,” came Jud’s reply. 

“ Good. Then we’ll have an easy time slipping 
back, I reckon,” said Paul. 


152 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

“Going all the way over to the shore; are 
you?” asked the other. 

“ Might as well ; though we’ll have to feel our 
way. Pretty shallow; ain’t it, Jud?” for the scout 
master had set the other to work sounding with 
one of the setting poles, by dropping it over every 
little while. 

“Touch bottom every time* but seems to be 
plenty of water. Guess this lake ain’t near so deep 
as that other one up by Rattlesnake Mountain,” 
Jud remarked. 

“ Oh ! it’s many times deeper on the other side 
of the island,” observed Paul. “ I picked out this 
way across for a good reason.” 

“ I suppose you did,” Jud said, with a sublime 
confidence that was refreshing. 

“Because, you see,” added Paul, “when we 
start back again, we’ll have to do without the help 
of our motors, for, muffle them as we might, 
they’d make enough noise to betray us.” 

“ Oh I I see now,” declared Jud, chuckling. “ In 
place of the motor business we’ll use good hard 
muscle with these setting poles. And so long as 
we can touch* bottom right along, it ain’t going to 
be a very hard job getting back to the island. 
You don’t think it’s more’n half a mile; do you, 
Paul?” 

“ Not much more, and we can take our time, 
Jud. The one thing above all others we’ve got 


UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS 153 

to keep in mind is silence. Nobody ought to knock 
a pole against the side of a boat under penalty 
of being given black marks. And as for talking, 
it’ll have to be in whispers, when at all.” 

“S-s-sounds g-g-good to m-m-me,” said Bluff, 
who somehow seemed to have gone back to his 
old stuttering ways; though it might be the ex- 
citement that caused the lapse. 

Nothing more was said on the way over, though 
doubtless the boys kept up considerable thinking. 
They were tremendously worked up over the situa- 
tion. This scheme proposed by the scout leader 
seemed to appeal to the spirit of adventure which 
nearly every boy who has red blood in his veins 
feels to be a part of his nature. 

There was one among them, however, who was 
silent because of another reason; for Old Dan 
Tucker always declared it a very bad and in- 
jurious plan to try and converse when one’s mouth 
was crammed full; and crackers, too, being apt 
to get in the wind-pipe, may do all manner of 
choking stunts. So he said never a word. 

They presently could see the other shore loom- 
ing up, though it was getting very dark, just as 
though a storm might be threatening to again 
demoralize them. 

Getting more shoal, Paul,” warned the pole 
heaver. 

“How much water have you now?” demanded 


154 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 

the leader, ready to give the signal for bringing 
both motorboats to a stop, when it seemed neces- 
sary. 

“Eight feet, last time; now it’s about seven, 
short,” announced Jud. 

“ Keep on sounding, and when it gets down to 
three, let me know,” ordered Paul. 

They were creeping along at a snail’s pace now, 
80 even should either boat strike mud bottom, 
which Jud had declared it to be, no particular 
damage would result. 

The shore was very close, and still Jud ad- 
mitted that there was plenty of water. 

“ Keeps up in great shape. Commodore,” he 
remarked, “reckon we could go ashore here if we 
felt that way.” 

“Which we don’t,” declared Gusty Bellows, in 
a low tone. 

And not a single voice was raised in favor of 
such a proceeding; if there were any timid souls 
present, they failed to exhibit their weakness, 
either through fear of boyish ridicule, or some 
other reason. 

Then Paul shut off power, and when he no 
longer heard the sound of the Comforts exhaust. 
Jack followed suit. 

“We’ll hang out here for half an hour, and 
then head back,” explained Paul. 


UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS 155 


“The outlet isn’t far away from here; is it?” 
Joe Clausin asked. 

“Not very far — on the right,” Paul replied. 
“ I had that in mind when choosing to come this 
way. You see, if we were intending to only go 
ashore, they’d expect to see a fire burning some- 
where. As it is, they’ll be sure to think we’ve 
dropped down into the Radway, preferring to 
risk all sorts of danger from the rocks and snags 
there, rather than stay here another night” 

“Makes me think of Napoleon’s retreat from 
Moscow,” remarked Nat Smith in the other mo- 
torboat. 

“Oh I come off, will you?” ridiculed Bobolink. 
“Napoleon was a good one, but not in the same 
class with us. He never came back, like we’re go- 
ing to do. This retreat is only a fine piece of 
strategy, remember, while his was in deadly earn- 
est” 

They talked in low tones that were cousins to 
whispers, and certainly could not be heard half 
way over to the mysterious island, even though 
water does make the finest conductor of sound 
possible, as every boy knows. 

Finally, when about half an hour had gone, 
Paul said it was time to make a fresh start. He 
had thought it all out, and while taking one pole 
himself, asked the expert, Jud, to handle the other 
in their boat. 


156 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

Jack and Tom Betts were to look after those in 
the Speedwell; for the scout master knew that 
Tom could be very careful, given a job that re- 
quired caution. 

They took their time, and by degrees Paul led 
the way across the shallow part of the lake. Bob- 
olink had aptly described their movement, when 
he said it reminded him of the words in the song; 
“He came right in, and turned around and walked 
right out again.” 

Now it was so dark that most of the scouts 
found themselves confused as to their bearings, 
the minute they lost sight of the trees along the 
shore. Some wondered how Paul was going to 
go straight back over their recent course, when 
he did not have even the stars to guide him. 

But then, there were many other things he did 
have, one of which was the slight breeze that blew 
in his face, and which had been directly behind 
them at the time they left the island. 

Slowly and laboriously, in comparison with 
their other trip, the scouts crossed the stretch of 
water. And when finally those who were so ea- 
gerly watching out for that cedar on the top of the 
little elevation in the middle of the island whis- 
pered to Paul that it was dead ahead, they real- 
ized with wonder that the pilot had led them in 
a direct line back over their course. 

Now they altered the line of advance a little. 


UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS 157 


This was in order to approach the island about 
the place where the little bay extended into its 
side, as described by Jack. And Paul allowed 
the other to take the lead, since Jack would be 
more familiar with the locality than he himself 
might feel. 

Noiselessly did the two boats enter that minia- 
ture bay, and glide along until close to the bank, 
where the overhanging trees afforded the protec- 
tion they wanted, in order to conceal the craft. 

Landing was next in order, and then all their 
things must again be taken ashore, from tents and 
blankets, to cooking kettles and eatables. 

By now the scouts had reduced many of these 
things to a system. Every boy knew just what 
was expected of him; and presently there was a 
procession of burden bearers carrying things into 
the brush along a certain trail, once in a while 
perhaps stumbling a little, but keeping strict si- 
lence. 

They seemed to enjoy it hugely, too. Their 
nerves tingled while carrying out this part of the 
programme — at least. Bobolink said he had such 
a feeling, and doubtless several more were in the 
same condition. 

Of course there were those who trembled with 
anticipation of some sudden alarm. And then 
again, others might be beginning to think they 
would soon nearly “cave away” with the empty 


158 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


feeling they had; that was what Old Dan Tucker 
confided in a whisper to Joe Clausin, resting firm 
in the belief that none of the others knew about 
the pocket full of crackers, that he called “life 
preservers” — which, alas, were all gone now, to 
the last crumb. 

Paul led the line and picked out the easiest 
method of reaching the place he had selected 
for the new camp among the rocks and trees. It 
was in a depression, too, the others noticed, when 
he told them to drop their bundles. That would 
enable them to have a little fire, since it could not 
be seen as it would be if they were on a level, 
or an elevation. And really, a fire was necessary, 
if Paul meant they should have any supper at all. 

*‘As we brought about all we need, there’s no 
use of making another trip to the boats,” Paul 
remarked in a low tone; from which the others 
judged that conversation was not going to be en- 
tirely cut out, only they must not elevate their 
voices above a certain pitch, so long as things 
were as quiet as at present. 

Now began the task of getting the three tents 
in position again. And well had the scouts learned 
their lesson in this particular; some of them even 
going so far as to declare that they could do the 
job with their eyes blindfolded, so familiar were 
they with every part of the operation. 


UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS 159 

“ Like learning type-writin* by touch in school,” 
Bobolink had said. 

After all the tents had been raised, and the 
blankets placed inside, Paul gave permission for 
a small cooking fire to be made. 

To some boys a fire is always a fire, no matter 
what its intended use; but the scout who has 
camped out soon gets to know that there is a 
vast difference between a camp fire, for instance, 
and one meant only for getting meals over. 

The former may be composed of great logs 
and branches that send up a cheery and brilliant 
blaze ; but which is next to useless when the cook 
wants to get close in, and attend to his various 
kettles and frying pans. 

Sometimes a hole is scooped out of the ground, 
and the fire for cooking made in that, especially 
when on level ground, and danger exists of hos- 
tile eyes discovering the blaze, however small. 

As a rule, however, such a fire is made about 
after this fashion: Two logs may be used, if they 
have flat surfaces, having been more or less 
squared off ; but when stones can be procured they 
are to be preferred. Two sides are fashioned 
out of flat stones, somewhat in the shape of the 
letter V, only not having the line quite so pro- 
nounced. Thus a coffeepot will rest snugly over 
the smaller end, while the big frying pan cozily 
covers the larger. 


i6o THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


The fire need only be small, but when the cook- 
ing commences, there should be for the most part 
red embers in the fireplace, capable of sending up 
great heat, with but a minimum of blaze. And 
there a cook can work in comfort, without dodg- 
ing back every time a fierce blaze darts toward 
him, threatening to singe his eyebrows, and 
shorten his crop of hair. 

Jud knew just how to make such a fire, and as 
they would need several, in order to cook for such 
a host, some of the other boys busied themselves 
in copying what he did. They had seen him make 
such a stone fireplace before, any way, and some 
of them had practiced the art in private, being 
desirous of knowing how to do many of the things 
the leaders were so proficient in. 

Soon they had more light, when Jud got his 
fire started; and It was then that the boys realized 
just how fitting that spot was for a hidden camp. 
Their tents could not be seen thirty feet away; 
and as for the small amount of light made by 
the three cooking fires, little danger of it being 
noticed, unless some one were close by, and ac- 
tually stumbled on the spot. 

In fact, the greatest chance they had of being 
discovered, as Paul well knew, did not come from 
any sense of sight or hearing, but that of smell. 
Should the odors from their supper chance to be 
carried across the Island, and In the direction of 


UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS i6i 


where these men were staying, they might begin 
to suspect something was wrong, and start an in- 
vestigation that would lead to the discovery of the 
new camp. 

But Paul had also noticed that the night breeze 
was doing them another good service; it had 
helped him find his way back to the island through 
the darkness resting on the big lake; and now, 
blowing toward the distant shore, the odors of 
cooking coffee, and frying bass would be taken 
entirely away. 

And anyhow, there were eighteen half-starved 
scouts who had to be fed, come what might. So 
the cooking went on apace, and in due time sup- 
per was announced as ready. At which more 
than a few of the waiting lads heaved sighs of 
satisfaction, and Old Dan Tucker, as usual, man- 
aged to be the first to sit down. 


CHAPTER XVII 


PITCHING TENTS IN THE ''sINK" 

“This thing is giving us lots of good practice 
at making camp, and that’s something,” Bobolink 
remarked while he ate, always taking care to 
keep his voice down to a low pitch, so It would 
not carry far on the night air; though for that 
matter the wind had increased by now and was 
making quite some noise through the tops of the 
trees around them. 

“ I’d like to see anybody put up tents faster 
and better than we did right here,” declared Frank 
Savage; who had by now about recovered from 
the feeling of sickness which came so near keep- 
ing him at home, when the expedition was formed. 

“And as for fires, these couldn’t be beat,” ob- 
served Spider Sexton, as he began to catch 
glimpses of the bottom of his tin platter, after 
making away with some of the food that had been 
piled high on it by the cook of his mess. 

“And talk about the grub — It just takes the 
cake,” admitted Old Dan Tucker; though no one 
seemed to pay the least attention to what he 

162 


PITCHING TENTS IN THE “SINK^^ 163 


thought, for they knew him of old, and that the 
present meal was always the “best he had ever 
eaten, barring none.” 

Of course it was only natural that while the 
scouts were enjoying their meal in this fashion, 
many looks betrayed an uneasiness on the part 
of some among their number. Possibly they were 
wondering whether it could be that hostile eyes 
were fixed upon them then and there, and if so, 
what those strange, unknown men, who seemed 
to want to rule the island, would do when they 
discovered that the scouts had disobeyed their or- 
der to leave. 

Would they resort to violence? It would not 
be an easy task to banish a dozen and a lialf lively 
boys, they were thinking. 

Paul had made up his mind with regard to 
certain things that must be done. First of all, 
they ought to get their heads together, and de- 
cide on a plan. Should they make any sort of 
attempt that night to explore the island? He 
owned a splendid little hand electric torch, into 
which he had slipped a fresh battery before start- 
ing out on the voyage along the two rivers; and 
this might prove very useful in searching dark 
• and gloomy parts of the island. But on the whole, 
it seemed so foolish to think of such a thing, Paul 
wanted the rest to settle the matter. 

So, still cautioning them to speak onlv in whis- 


i 64 the banner BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


pers at the most, he placed the whole matter before 
them; much as might the chairman of a meeting, 
after which he asked in so many words: 

“You’ve heard all I now about it; now, what is 
your pleasure, fellows?” 

“ So far as I’m concerned,” said Bobolink, 
always the first to speak; “I’m willing to do any- 
thing the rest say, or go wherever they want to 
head; but to be honest, boys, I’d think we were 
off our base if we went prowling around this queer 
old island at night time. There are a heap of 
things about it that some people don’t want us 
to know, it seems ; and we ought to take daylight 
to spear such facts.” 

Others were of the same opinion; and when 
Paul put the vote, it was overwhelmingly the sen- 
timent of the meeting that they simply take things 
as easy as they could until dawn came, and then, 
with fourteen hours of light ahead, do all the 
exploring they liked. 

That settled it, since there could be no going 
behind the returns when a majority favored any 
move. Accordingly, they made preparations for 
passing the night as the conditions best allowed. 

“Of course, we must have sentries posted to 
keep watch?” remarked Jack. 

“ All through the livelong night. They will have 
to be changed every hour; and four can be on 
guard at a time. That’ll give about two turns to 


PITCHING TENTS IN THE “ SINK 165 


every scout, with a chance to get four hours sleep 
between times on duty.” 

And having said this, Paul, as the acting scout 
master, proceeded to assign each one to his post 
number. There was no confusion. They had 
practiced this same movement many a time, and 
now that it was to be carried out, the boys profited 
by their experience. 

It could be seen that there was a condition of 
almost feverish excitement under the surface, try 
as they might to conceal the fact by an appearance 
of coolness. A real peril seemed to be hovering 
over them, since they had chosen to disobey the 
mandate of the unknown who seemed to claim 
the island as his private property. And if they 
were discovered during the night, there would be 
no telling what might happen. 

At the same time the boys were enjoying the 
novel experience. It seemed to give them a peculiar 
thrill, not unlike that of a daring skater who shoots 
boldly over thin, new ice, that crackles under him, 
and bends in a dreadful way, but does not break, 
because his passage has been too swift. 

In the morning Paul would pick out several of 
them, as he thought best; and with this exploring 
party set out to learn what the island contained. 
Meanwhile they would rest quietly in that rocky 
retreat, in the hope that their return had not 


i66 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


been noted by any observing eye, and that their 
presence on the island was utterly unknown. 

The sentries had been selected, and every boy 
knew just when his turn to take a post would come 
around. Those who were ready to lie down and 
get some rest were expected to arouse their suc- 
cessors, so that the thing wa^ calculated to run 
along as smoothly as though on a greased track. 

If anything out of the ordinary came to pass, 
and there was time to arouse the scout master, 
Paul wanted it done. He could not remain awake 
himself more than any one of the others, much 
as he might wish to be on the job all the time; 
but that need not prevent his keeping in touch 
with whatever happened. 

Paul still had his shotgun, and had of course 
made sure to bring it from the motorboat when 
he led his column of burden-bearers trailing 
through the timber and rocks to that little sink 
In which the new camp had been pitched. It had 
served him often and well, and he was accustomed 
to placing the utmost confidence In the trusty little 
weapon. But he hoped he would find no occasion 
to use It now, and against human beings. Only 
as the very last resort would he turn to this. 

Still, there are times when the presence of an 
empty gun has done wonders; since Imagination 
invests it with all the attributes of a loaded weap- 
on. And that was one of the many reasons why 


PITCHING TENTS IN THE SINK 167 


Paul kept the double-barreled gun close to him, 
even when he crept into the tent to which he was 
assigned, and lay down on his blanket to try and 
get a little sleep. 

Some of the other boys whispered for a while, 
as they lay with their heads close together; but 
they were too sleepy to keep this up for long; 
so that one by one they dropped off, until from 
their regular breathing it was easy to guess that 
all had surrendered to the heavy hand of sleep. 

Those on guard duty were not supposed to move 
about very much. They had been posted at what 
might be called the four corners of the camp. 
Here they could, between them, about cover all 
the space around the sink, for their positions were 
on the more elevated ground. 

And as the clouds were breaking at the time 
Paul crawled under the tent, he felt pretty sure 
that before long they would have the assistance of 
the moon, now more than half full, and which 
would not set until after midnight. 

Those who were the first on duty fulfilled their 
part of the programme faithfully. After standing 
out their “ spell,” they proceeded to quietly awaken 
those who were scheduled to follow after them. 
Each fellow knew who his successor was, and it 
had been made a part of his duty to see that this 
scout was not only awakened, but on the job; after 
which he himself could crawl in under his blanket. 


i68 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


and take it easy until his second turn came, hours 
later. 

Thus Bobolink was one of the second watch. 
In turn he would have the pleasure of arousing 
the commander, and seeing that Paul took up his 
duty; for in laying out the schedule Paul had 
not spared himself in the least. 

Bobolink was an imaginative boy. He could see 
many things that others were apt to pass by with- 
out discovering anything out of the ordinary. It 
was a weakness which Bobolink had to guard 
against; lest he discover things that had no foun- 
dation in fact. 

He sat there, listening and looking, for a long 
time. The music of the breeze in the tree-tops 
made him a little nervous at first; but presently 
he seemed to get more accustomed to the sounds, 
and then they made him drowsy, so that he had 
to take himself sharply to task more than once 
because his eyes found it so easy to shut. 

Wishing to have something to think about, so 
as to keep Ris wits aroused. Bobolink began to try 
and figure out just where his fellow sentinels were 
located and imagine what they were doing. Could 
they be struggling, as he was, to keep awake, one 
of the hardest things a boy can battle with? 

What was that? Surely something moved out 
yonder among the scrub I 

Bobolink sat straight up. He was no longer 


PITCHING TENTS IN THE “ SINK 169 


sleepy. This thing seemed to have made his eyes 
fly wide open ; and with his heart pumping at a tre- 
mendous rate, sending the hot blood bounding 
through his veins, surely he was now in no danger 
of sleeping on his post. 

He watched the spot from which the sound had 
seemingly come. The moon penetrated the bushes 
only faintly, because it was now nearing the west- 
ern horizon, its journey for the night almost done. 
Strive as Bobolink might to see whether any one 
was crawling along there, he could not for a 
time make sure. 

Then he detected a movement that must mean 
something. And at the same time he discovered 
what seemd to be twin glowworms In the dark- 
ness. 

Bobolink had had some little experience in such 
things, and had read a good deal on the subject. 
He knew that in the night time the eyes of many 
wild animals, particularly of the cat tribe, can ap- 
pear luminous, so that, seen In a certain kind of 
gloom, they seem to be like yellow globes. And 
that was what these were. 

“ Huh I ” said Bobolink to himself, after he had 
watched these queer glowing balls of fire move sev- 
eral times, that proved In his mind they must be the 
eyes of an animal: “ Guess I better give Paul the 
high sign, and let him figure out what it is.” 


170 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


[And with that he started to creep into the camp, 
leaving his post for the time being unguarded; for 
with three other sentries on duty Bobolink did not 
imagine there could be any danger in his withdraw- 
ing from the line. 


CHAPTER XVIII 


WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH 

“ Wake up, Paul I ” 

Bobolink accompanied these whispered words 
by a gentle shake. He seemed to know instinctively 
just where the scout master was lying; or else it 
must have been, that all this had been systematic- 
ally laid out beforehand; and every fellow had a 
particular place where he was to curl up in his blan- 
ket when not on duty. 

Paul was awake instantly, even though he had 
been far gone in sleep at the moment that hand 
touched his arm. 

“All right, Bobolink,” he said, in a low tone, so 
as not to arouse any of the others. “ Pm with you. 
Time up ? ” 

“ Not quite, Paul ; but there’s some sort of beast 
creeping around the camp; and I thought you 
ought to know.” 

Paul sat up at once. 

“You did the right thing. Bobolink,” he re- 
marked, quietly. 

The sentry could hear him groping around, as if 


172 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

for something. Presently Paul seemed to have 
found what he sought. Of course It was his shot- 
gun. 

Wildcats were to be found in some of the woods 
not many miles from Stanhope. The scouts knew 
this, because they had experience with these bold 
pests, who had been attracted by the smell of food 
in their camp. Besides, there were sometimes packs 
of wild dogs roaming the woods that might need 
to be taught a lesson, in case they gave the camp- 
ers any trouble. 

So Paul had been wise to bring that double-bar- 
reled gun along. In a pinch it would prove a 
handy thing to have with them. And no doubt it 
gave Bobolink considerable satisfaction to realize 
that Paul had such a weapon handy. 

Immediately the sentry started to crawl out of 
the tent again, with Paul close at his heels. A head 
was raised, and one of the supposed sleepers 
watched the dim figures retreating. 

It was Nuthin, who had chanced to be restless, 
and was awake at the time Bobolink came in to 
arouse the scout master. He had heard all that 
passed between them, and of course felt a thrill 
at the idea of some ferocious wild beast prowling 
around the tents. 

Hardly had the other pair withdrawn before 
Nuthin started after them. He might be a rather 
timid boy by nature ; but when there was anything 


WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH 


173 


going on Nuthin could not rest content unless he 
placed himself in a position where he could see or 
hear — perhaps both. 

Bobolink led the way back to the post he had 
been occupying at the time he made his discovery. 
He hoped those luminous eyes would still be there, 
because it might not look just right should he be 
able to show no proof of his story; and boys will 
take occasion to make all sorts of jeering remarks 
about a fellow falling asleep on his post, and 
dreaming wonderful things. 

So it was with considerable anxiety that the 
sentry crept along to the very spot which he re- 
membered he had been occupying at the time. 

Considerably to his dismay he could see nothing. 
There was the patch of brush in which he had dis- 
covered those gleaming orbs, and from which had 
arisen a low, threatening growl when he first 
moved off ; but look as he might Bobolink was un- 
able to detect the first sign of a hostile presence. 

He felt disgusted with himself. Luck seemed 
to be playing him all manner of tricks of late, and 
nothing went right. There was that affair of 
the queer boxes which had been bothering him so 
long; then the mystery of the unknown men who 
had ordered the scouts to leave the island in such 
a peremptory fashion, without giving the least rea- 
son for their churlishness. And now, here, even 
this little matter could not work straight 


174 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

“ It’s gone, Paul I ” he felt compelled to mutter, 
after striving several times to detect some sign, 
however faint, of those terrible yellow eyes. 

“Just where did you see it. Bobolink?” asked 
the scout master, knowing from his chum’s man- 
ner how disappointed the sentry must feel that 
he was thus unable to prove his assertion. 

“ Right in that brush yonder; you c’n see it looks 
darker than anything else,” replied Bobolink, eag- 
erly; as if hoping that after all Paul’s eyes might 
prove better than his own, and pick up the lost 
glow. 

“Well, it seems to have gone away, then,” said 
the scout master. 

“ I’m afraid so,” grumbled Bobolink, for all the 
world as though his whole reputation for veracity 
depended on his showing the other that he had not 
been imagining things when he gave his alarm. 

“ What did you see ? ” continued Paul. 

“Two yellow eyes, and say, weren’t they just 
awful, though? But seems like the varmint has 
side-stepped, and vamoosed. Just my luck, hang 
5tl I wanted you to see ’em the worst kind, 
Paul.” 

“A pair of shining eyes, eh ? When you moved, 
did you hear anything. Bobolink?” 

“ Sure I did. It growled just like our dog does 
at home, when he’s got a bone, and anybody gets 
too near him,” the sentry hastened to explain. 


WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH 


175 

“ Made you think of a dog, did it, and not a 
cat?” asked Paul, quickly. 

“Why, yes, I reckon it did,” replied Bobolink; 
“ leastways, that’s what came into my mind. But 
then a big cat, a regular bobcat, I take it, could 
growl that way, if it felt a notion to.” 

“You came straight in to wake me up, of 
course?” continued Paul, wishing to figure on the 
time that might have elapsed since Bobolink left 
his post. 

“ Crawled right in, and we got back here in a 
jiffy; but you see it was no use when that jinx is 
on my trail, meanin’ to loco everything I do. 
Now, I reckon if it’d been any other feller in the 
bunch, the critter’d just stood its ground, and I’d 
be vindicated. But me — I’m hoodooed of late, 
and can’t do a thing straight.” 

“ Listen I ” said Paul, a little sharply, as though 
he had no sympathy with such talk. 

They strained their hearing for possibly a full 
minute. Then Bobolink, who liked to talk, could 
no longer hold in. 

“ What’d you think you heard, Paul? ” he whis- 
pered. 

“A little rustling sound just alongside the brush 
you pointed out,” the scout master replied. 

“But you didn’t get it again; did you?” urged 
the other. 

“ No. But that needn’t be proof that something 


176 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


isn’t there, and watching us, even if we don’t 
glimpse his eyes,” replied Paul. 

“ Oh I ” ejaculated Bobolink, with a sudden sense 
of relief in his voice. 

“You heard the rustling then; didn’t you?” 
Paul demanded. 

“ I sure did, and right over back of the brush it 
seemed to be. P’raps he’s givin’ the camp the 
shake, Paul; mebbe he’s made up his mind it ain’t 
as healthy a place as he thought, after all.” 

“ It couldn’t be one of the other sentries mov- 
ing around, I suppose?” ventured Paul, at which 
his companion gave a low chuckle. 

“With those glaring yellow eyes? Well, hard- 
ly, Paul. My stars! but if you’d only seen ’em, 
you’d never say that. And besides, the boys were 
ordered not to leave their posts, only to wake 
up the fellow that came after ’em. Oh! put it 
down for me that isn’t any of our bunch stirring 
around.” 

“Then I must find out what it is! ” said Paul, 
with a ring of determination in his voice. 

“Wow! d’ye mean to rush the beast, Paul, and 
try to knock him over with a charge of Number 
Sevens?” demanded Bobolink. 

“ I’ve got something better than that to scare 
him off,” replied Paul. “ You know we don’t want 
to shoot a gun, if we can help it; because the re- 
port would tell the men that we’d come back, and 


WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH 


177 


might bring trouble. IVe got my little electric 
hand torch with me, and if I flash that into the 
face of any wild animal the chances are it’ll give 
him a scare that’ll send him off about his busi- 
ness.” 

“ Oh I I forgot all about that,” said Bobo- 
link.” It’s just the thing, too. How lucky you 
brought it along, Paul.” 

Bobolink looked on a good many things as 
“luck,” one way or the other, when of a truth 
they w^ere really planned ahead. The scout mas- 
ter had realized that such a useful little contriv- 
ance would be apt to come in handy on many 
occasions, when camping out, and had made it a 
particular point to put the torch in his pack before 
leaving home. 

He had it beside him as he slept, but did not 
consider it wise to press the button when 
awakened, lest the flash arouse the others who 
were sleeping in the same tent. 

Bobolink could feel him moving away, and not 
meaning to be left behind, he started after. Bobo- 
link possessed courage, even if he lacked discre- 
tion. The possibility of an encounter with this 
doubtless savage animal did not deter him from 
following his leader. 

Again they heard that suspicious rustling in 
the bushes ahead, this time louder than before. 
And quickly on the heels of this sound came a 


178 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

low, threatening growl that, strangely enough, 
made Bobolink chuckle softly, he was so pleased 
over having his announcement proven true to the 
Commodore of the motorboat fleet. 

“Look out, Paul,” he whispered; “he’s laying 
for you in those bushes. Better keep your gun 
handy, and be ready to give him Hail Colum- 
bia!” 

Paul did not answer. He had his gun held 
in such a way that it could be fired with a sec- 
ond’s warning. At the same time his left hand 
was gripping the little electric torch, with his 
thumb pressed against the trigger that would con- 
nect the battery, and send an intense ray of light 
wherever he pointed. 

When he heard another rustle, and a growl 
even more vicious than before, he judged about 
the position of the sounds, and pointing the end 
of the torch straight ahead, pressed the button. 

As the vivid flash followed Paul saw something 
that looked like a crouching panther staring at 
the dazzling glow of his torch — a hairy beast 
that had rather a square head, and a tail that 
was lashing to and fro, just as he had seen that 
of a domestic cat move with jerks, when a hos- 
tile dog approached too close to suit her ideas of 
safety. 


CHAPTER XIX 


LAYING PLANS 


‘‘Whee!” 

That, of course, was Bobolink giving expression 
to his feelings when he too saw the crouching fig- 
ure of the ugly beast in the pile of brush. 

He fully expected that Paul would now feel it 
necessary to raise his gun to his shoulder, and fire, 
on the spur of the moment. Contrary to his be- 
lief, he found that the scout master did nothing 
of the sort. Instead, Paul took a deliberate step 
forward, straight toward the animal that lay there, 
staring at the blinding light. 

“ Oh ! my stars ! he’s going to scare him off with 
only that light I ” said Bobolink, talking to himself; 
and yet, strange to say, he followed close at the 
heels of the advancing scout master, clutching his 
club tightly, and doubtless fully determined that 
if they were attacked, he would make the stout 
weapon give a good account of itself. 

For a brief space it seemed an open question 
whether the Animal would turn tail and slink away, 
or openly attack the advancing boys. But there 
179 


l8o THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


was evidently something in that approaching daz- 
zling light, and the presence of human beings be- 
hind it, that proved too much for the beast. 
He gave a sudden turn, and bounded off, van- 
ishing in the denser scrub beyond; and for a 
short time the listening Bobolink could hear the 
sound of his retreat. 

“ Whew ! that was the stuff, Paul ! ” cried Bobo- 
link. “ He just couldn’t look you in the eye ; could 
he? That fierce little staring orb was too much 
for him. But what was it, Paul, a panther?” 

Some one laughed back of them, and turning, 
light in hand, Paul saw Nuthin. 

”What ails you, and how did you get here?” 
demanded Bobolink. 

“Heard what you said to Paul In the tent, 
and wanted to see what was up, so I just crawled 
out,” answered the smaller scout, still grinning, 
as though he had discovered something comical in 
the adventure. 

“Well, what ails you?” Bobolink demanded 
again, feeling irritated somehow. 

“Panther! Well, I guess he hasn’t got that 
wild, yet! ” ejaculated Nuthin. 

Paul began to understand something about it. 

“See here, Nuthin,” he said, sternly; “you 
know that was a dog, as well as I do ; have you 
ever seen him before? Do you know him?” 

Nuthin laughed softly^ 


LAYING PLANS 


l8l 

“ Guess you fellows must have forgot that old 
mongrel dog, Lion, we used to have,” he went on. 
“Well, he disappeared a long time ago, and we 
never knew what did become of him. There al- 
ways was a sorter wild streak in the critter. And 
now it seems that he’s found it nicer to live like a 
wolf in the woods, than stay at home and be tied 
to a kennel. Because that was Lion, I give you my 
word for it I ” 

“ Mebbe he smelled you here, and wanted to 
make up again?” suggested Bobolink. 

“ Don’t you believe it,” retorted Nuthin. “ He 
never did like me, and my dad wouldn’t let me go 
near his kennel. When he skipped out we all felt 
glad of it. And to think he’d show up here, of all 
places I What d’ye reckon he’s doin’ over here on 
this island, Paul?” 

“Listen. When he got away from you did he 
have a rope around his neck, with six feet of it 
trailing on the ground?” Paul asked. 

“Did he? Not any that I know about. We al- 
ways kept him fastened with a chain; and when 
he broke away, it was his collar that busted. I’ve 
got it home yet,” was the response. 

“Well, that dog had the rope, just as I de- 
scribed. He’s been tied up, of late, and broke 
away,” the scout master observed, with conviction 
in his voice. 

“Then he must have been in the keep of these 


i 82 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


men who’re doin’ somethin’ queer over here on 
Cedai Island, and don’t want a parcel of peepin’ 
scouts around; looks that way, don’t it, Paul?” 
Nuthin inquired. 

“I was wondering whether it could be that 
crowd, or the other,” Paul replied, musingly. 

“ D’ye mean the wild man? ” asked Bobolink. 

“ It might be,” replied Paul. “ If your old dog, 
Nuthin, has taken to the free life of the woods — 
gone back to the type of his ancestors, as I’ve 
heard of dogs doing many a time — why, you see, 
he’d just seem to fit in with a wild man who lived 
about like the savages used to away back.” 

“Wonder If he’ll come again to bother us?” 
queried Bobolink. 

“Honestly now, I don’t think he will,” Paul 
made answer. “That little evil eye of the torch 
threw a scare into him he won’t forget in a 
hurry. I suppose he must have been roaming 
around, and got a sniff of our cooking. That made 
him feel hungry, and he was creeping in closer 
and closer, in hopes of stealing something, when 
we broke up his game. And now, if it isn’t time 
for me to go on duty, I’ll crawl in again, and get a 
few more winks of sleep.” 

“ Say, Paul, don’t you think it’d be about right 
to leave that little flashlight with me, in case the 
dog comes around again?” asked Bobolink. 

“I was going to say that very same thing; and 


LAYING PLANS 


183 


when my turn comes you can hand it over again. 
Here you are, Bobolink; and don’t go to fooling 
with it, unless you really hear something.” 

“I won’t, Paul,” replied the other. “ But 
chances are. I’d better make the rounds and tell 
the other fellers about what happened; because 
they must have seen the flash, and heard us talk- 
in’ over here; which wiU throw ’em into a cold 
fit, wantin’ to know all about it.” 

“A good idea, Bobolink,” observed the other, 
as he and Nuthin moved toward the tents again. 

The balance of the night passed without any 
further alarm. If the wild dog came prowling 
around again, attracted by the presence of good 
things to eat, which may have reminded him of 
other days when he was content to remain chained 
up in the Cypher back yard, and take the leavings 
from his master’s table, he certainly did not betray 
his presence nor could he muster up enough cour- 
age to crawl into the camp, when it was guarded 
by such a terrible flashing eye. 

Morning arrived in good time, and the boys 
were on the alert. This novel experience was hav- 
ing its effect on them all. They showed that their 
sleep could not have been as sound as appearances 
might indicate, for many had red eyes, which 
were the cause of considerable comment, and not 
a little good-natured chaff on the part of those 


i 84 the banner BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


who betrayed no such telltale signs of wakeful- 
ness. 

Breakfast was prepared about in the same fash- 
ion as the supper had been on the preceding 
night. Fires were carefully lighted, and such fuel 
chosen, which, in the opinion of the best judges, 
would be least apt to send up heavy smoke, such^ 
as might betray their presence on the island. 

All these little things were supposed to be a 
part of their education as scouts and woodsmen. 
They aroused considerable interest among the 
boys, many of whom had never bothered their 
heads before to discover that kinds of wood 
burned in various ways; that one might give out 
only a light brown smoke, hard to discern, while 
another would send up a dense smudge that could 
not fail to attract the eye of any watcher. 

Paul showed them that when they wanted to 
signal with smoke, as all scouts are taught to do 
when learning the wigwag code, they must be 
careful to select only this latter kind of wood, 
since the other would not answer the purpose. 

He had been thinking deeply over the matter, 
and had abput made up his mind as to what 
course they should pursue. Like most of his 
comrades, Paul was averse to being driven away 
from Cedar Island by unknown parties, without 
at least another effort to explore the mysterious 


LAYING PLANS 185 

place, and making an attempt to discover what sort 
of business these men were engaged in. 

That it was something unlawful he was con- 
vinced, as much as any of his chums. Indeed, ev- 
erything would seem to point that way. Men 
do not often hide themselves in an unfrequented 
section of the country, unless they are engaged 
in some pursuit that will not stand the light of 
day. 

At one time Paul had even suspected that these 
men might be some species of game poachers, who 
wishing to defy the law that protected partridges, 
and all feather and fur-bearing creatures in the 
woods, during the summer season, had taken up 
their dwelling on lonely Cedar Island. 

This was in the beginning. On thinking it over, 
however, he came to the conclusion that there 
was hardly enough game of all kinds within fifty 
miles of Stanhope to pay several men to spend 
their time snaring it; and so on this account he 
had thrown that theory overboard. 

As they ate their breakfast the boys talked 
of nothing else but the mystery of the island, and 
many were the expressions of opinion that they 
must not think of leaving without doing every- 
thing in their power to lift the curtain. 

They Wanted to know who the strange men 
were who had brought some bulky object across 
from the mainland in a rowboat; what business 


i86 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


they were engaged in there; who the wild man 
might be, and last of all whether he had any con- 
nection with the others. 

“You see,” declared Bobolink, in his custo- 
mary impressive way of talking, “ it looks to me as 
if they had him here to scare meddlers off. Who 
wants to rub up against a wild man? Everybody 
would feel like giving the hairy old fellow a wide 
berth, believe me. But Paul, if you make up a 
bunch to explore this bally old island, please let 
me go along.” 

There were others just as anxious and then 
again some gave no expression to indicate how 
they felt about it. So the wise scout master, 
not wishing to have any half-hearted recruits with 
him on such an errand, observed these signs, and 
made sure to pick only such as had pleaded for 
recognition. 

“You can go along. Bobolink,” he said, pres- 
ently; “and I shall need five others in addition. 
Jack, you’re one; then there’s Bluff, Tom Betts, 
Phil, and Andy. Jud Elderkin will be left in full 
charge here, and every scout is expected to look to 
him as the chief while I’m gone. Is that all un- 
derstood, fellows?” 

Everybody looked satisfied — those who had 
been selected because they wanted to be with the 
party of exploration and the scouts who would 
remain behind because they had no particular de- 


LAYING PLANS 


187 


sire to prowl through that dense undergrowth, 
looking for what might prove to be a jack-o’-lan- 
tern. 

And as they continued to devour the food that 
had been cooked over the little fires they exchanged 
confidences, all sorts of queer theories and plans 
being suggested. For when eighteen wideawake 
scouts put their heads together, it can be set 
down as positive that little remains unsaid after 
they have debated any subject pro and con. 


CHAPTER XX 


THE EXPLORING PARTY 

Soon after breakfast was over, Paul began to 
make his arrangements. Like a wise general he 
wanted to have all the details arranged before- 
hand, so far as he could do so. 

“ I hope you’ll take the gun along, Paul,” re- 
marked Bobolink, when those who had been 
selected to accompany the leader were stowing 
some crackers and cheese in sundry pockets, so 
that they might have a little lunch, in case they 
were delayed longer than seemed probable. 

“Yes, because we’re more apt to find need for 
it than those who stay in camp,” the scout master 
had replied; which fact seemed to give Bobolink 
considerable satisfaction. 

He had not liked the looks of that big fellow 
which Nuthin claimed to have recognized as his 
old Lion. If they chanced to run across the beast 
again, it might feel disposed to attack them; and 
nothing would please Bobolink more than to have 
Paul bowl the creature over with a single shot. 
Any dog that did not have the sense to stay at 

i88 


THE EXPLORING PARTY 189 

home, and feed at the hands of a kind master, 
deserved to get the limit, he thought. 

“It isn’t that alone,” Bobolink had protested, 
when Paul took him to task for showing such a 
bloodthirsty spirit; “I’ve been hearing lately that 
some of the farmers up this way are complainin’ 
about dogs killin’ their lambs this last spring. And 
chances are, this same Lion’s been one of the 
pack that did the mischief. Once they start in that 
way, nothin’ can cure ’em but cold lead. My 
father said that right out at table. So you see, 
when dogs take to runnin’ loose, they’re just like 
boys, an’ get Into bad ways.” 

Paul thought this was a pretty good argument. 
He had himself made up his mind that should they 
ever meet that animal again, and he showed a dis- 
position to attack any of the scouts, there was 
only one thing to do. 

“How about getting Into communication with 
you while you’re gone?” asked Jud, who was nat- 
urally feeling the new responsibilities of his posi- 
tion more or less, and washed to be posted. 

“ It might be found a good thing,” replied the 
scout master; “ and we could do It easy enough by 
flags, if we managed to get to the top of that hill 
where the lone cedar grows. So all the time we’re 
away, Jud, be sure and have a scout posted In a 
tree, where he can watch that cedar, keeping his 
flag handy to answer, if he gets the signal. 


190 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


‘‘ Guess that can be fixed, all right,” declared 
Jud. 

“Have him keep his eye out for smoke at the 
same time,” continued Paul. “ We might want to 
tell you something, even without getting up to 
that cedar tree. And in case you felt like send- 
ing back an answer, you’d better have the boys 
collect a lot of that wood I showed you, that 
makes a black smoke. You know our smoke code, 
Jud; no danger of our failing to make good while 
you’re handling the other end of the line.” 

That made Jud smile, and feel like doing every- 
thing in his power to satisfy the scout master. A 
few drops of oil prevents a vast amount of fric- 
tion. Paul knew there are few boys who do not 
like to be appreciated; and they will do double the 
amount of work if they feel that they possess the 
full confidence of the one who has been placed in 
command over them. 

When the word was finally given for the little 
expedition to leave camp, and start into the un- 
known depths of the island, those who were to re- 
main behind insisted on shaking hands all around, 
and wishing them the best of luck. Bobolink pre- 
tended to make light of it, and to laugh at the 
fellows. 

“ Great Scott! you’d think we were going away 
off to Hudson’s Bay, not to come back again for 
many moons, if ever!” he scoffed. “Talk about 


THE EXPLORING PARTY 


191 

Stanley’s farewell to Livingstone in the African 
jungle, why it wasn’t in the same class as this. 
Don’t you dare try to embrace me, Dan Tucker. 
What d’ye think I am, the pretty new girl that’s 
come to town, and who danced with you at our 
class spread? Hands off , now ! And don’t any of 
you cry when we’re gone. I declare if you aren’t 
turnin’ into a lot of old women.” 

So the seven scouts strode away from the hid- 
den camp in the sink, plunging into the heavy 
growth of timber that covered most of the island. 
Once only did they turn, to wave a goodbye to 
their watching companions, who flourished their 
hats in response, but dared not give the cheer that 
was in their hearts, because Paul had enjoined the 
strictest silence. 

Paul and Jack had more than once tried to figure 
out what Cedar Island must look like; but at the 
best it was only guess work. None of them had 
ever been here before, and so far they had only 
roamed over a small portion of one end of the 
island, so that they could not tell even its general 
shape. 

That was one of the reasons why Paul wanted to 
clknb the little hill on which grew the cedar from 
which the island must have taken its name. Once 
they gained this point, he fancied they might be 
able to see all parts of the place, and in thU 


192 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


manner get a comprehensive idea as what it was 
like. 

They kept pretty well together as they pushed 
through the brush and timber. Paul instructed 
them to watch constantly on all sides, so that noth- 
ing might escape their scrutiny; and as the little 
band of scouts pushed deeper into the unknown 
depths of the mysterious island, they felt more 
than ever a sense of the responsibility that rested 
upon their shoulders. 

As one of the boys had remarked before, this 
was good training. They could look back to 
other occasions when they had roamed the woods, 
once in search of a little chap who had been lost; 
but somehow these incidents lacked the flavor of 
mystery that surrounded them now. 

If these men should turn out to be what they 
already suspected, lawless counterfeiters, would 
they not be apt to show a revengeful spirit if the 
persistent boys interfered with their business to 
any extent? 

Just how far he would be justified in leading 
his companions on, when there was this element 
of danger in the affair, was a serious question, 
which Paul had as yet not settled in his mind. He 
was waiting until something more definite turned 
up, and when that occurred he expected to be 
governed by circumstances to a great extent. 

Of course they had frequent little shocks. These 


THE EXPLORING PARTY 


193 


came when some small animals rustled the bushes 
in fleeing before them, or a bird started out of the 
thick branches of a tree. 

The boys were keyed up to such a pitch that 
their nerves were on edge. When a crow, that 
had been watching their coming with suspicious 
eye, gave a series of harsh caws, and flapping his 
wings, took flight, Andy caught hold of Bluff’s 
sleeve, and gave it a tug. 

“Q-q-quit t-t-thatl” exclaimed Bluff, in a shrill 
whisper. “ G-g-guess I’m k-k-keyed up enough, 
without m-m-akin’ me j-j-jump out of my s-s-skin ! ” 

“Arrah but I thought it was that ould dog 
a-goin’ to lape at us, so I did 1 ” muttered the Irish 
lad, shaking his head, and grasping his cudgel 
more firmly. 

All of them had been wise enough to arm them- 
selves in some way before starting out. And when 
seven fairly muscular boys wield that many clubs, 
that have been tried and found true, they ought 
to be capable of doing considerable execution. But 
in truth there were but six of the cudgels, for Paul 
carried his gun only. 

They had by now cleared quite considerable 
ground, even though their progress was in any- 
thing but a direct line. On account of dense patch- 
es of thorn bushes Paul found it necessary to make 
various detours ; but then this did not matter to any 
great extent; for while it added to the length of 


194 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


their journey, at the same time it promised to re- 
'^eal more of the Island to their search. 

One chmg surprised Paul. They found the trees 
so dense that most of the time it was possible to 
obtain only glimpses of the sky above. Fortu- 
nately the sun continued to shine. He thought It 
must be pretty dingy here on a cloudy day. And 
the more he saw of Cedar Island the less he won- 
dered that some of the Ignorant country people be- 
lieved It to be haunted. 

Bobolink must have been allowing his mind to 
run In a similar groove, for presently pushing up 
alongside Paul, he remarked in a whisper: 

“Gee! did you ever see a more spooky place 
than this Is, Paul? Now, If a fellow did believe 
in ghosts, which of course I don’t, here’s where 
he’d expect to run across some of them. Look 
at that hollow over yonder, would you? There 
goes a woodchuck dodging back Into his hole In 
the bank. Ain’t It queer how all these animals 
ever got across from the mainland to this island? 
Why, seemed like all of half a mile to me.” 

“Wait till we get on top of that hill, and per- 
haps the thing won’t seem so queer, after all,” 
replied Paul. “ I was thinking the same way; and 
then It struck me that the land might be a whole 
lot closer to the island on the northern side. Why, 
how do we know but what It’s only a narrow 
strait there?” 


THE EXPLORING PARTY 


195 


“ I wonder, now,” mused Bobolink, who always 
found much food for thought in what informa- 
tion he extracted from the scout master. 

They kept on for some five minutes longer, 
under about the same conditions. Paul, how- 
ever, began to believe that they must by now be 
drawing somewhere near the foot of the little 
hill that arose near the center of the island, as 
closely as they could figure from their camp at 
the southern end. 

The result of their watchfulness was made ap- 
parent when Tom Betts suddenly declared that 
he had seen something that looked like a black- 
smith’s forge just beyond a screen of bushes ahead 
of them. 

Cautiously advancing, the seven scouts pres- 
ently found themselves looking upon the exact 
object Tom had mentioned, which proved that 
his powers of observation were good. It was a 
forge of some sort, with a bellows attached, and 
a wind screen, but no shelter over the top ; which 
fact would seem to indicate that it must be in the 
nature of a field smithy, used for certain purposes 
to heat or melt metal. 

There being no sign of life around, Paul and 
his six followers swarmed out of the brush, and 
surrounded the forge, which was about as un- 
likely a thin^ to be run across, away in this for- 


196 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


saken quarter of the country, as anything they 
could imagine. 

And as Paul examined the portable forge closer 
he made an interesting discovery. 


CHAPTER XXI 


A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE 

“This has been used since we had that hard 
rain, fellows,” Paul observed. 

Some of the others had noticed him handling 
the ashes that marked where the fire had been. 

‘‘Say, they are not warm, now, are they?” 
asked Phil, looking uneasily around, as if half 
expecting to see some rough men come swarming 
out of the bushes. 

“Oh I I didn’t mean that,” replied the scout 
master. “ But you can see for yourselves that 
when it rains there’s nothing to keep the water 
from running down over this forge. In that 
case the ashes would be soaked. If you look 
again you’ll see these are perfectly dry, and have 
never been wet.” 

Several of the scouts picked up some of the 
ashes, and found that it was exactly as Paul stated. 
They were as dry as powder; and could certainly 
never have been rained upon. 

“That means the forge has been used since 
197 


198 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


the storm that helped us get through that muddy 
canal of Jackson’s Creek; is that what you mean, 
Paul?” asked Bobolink. 

“ Nothing else,” replied the other, still continu- 
ing his investigations, as if he hoped to make 
some further discovery, that might tell them what 
the field forge was intended for, when these un- 
known men carried it to this secluded island. 

‘‘ Great governor, Paul I ” 

Bobolink had stooped, and picked something 
from the ground. This he was now holding in 
his hand, and staring at it, as though he could 
hardly believe his eyes. 

The other scouts crowded around him, and their 
eyes, too, widened when they discovered what it 
was. 

quarter of a dollar!” exclaimed Jack. 

“And a shining new one in the bargain,” de- 
clared Tom Betts. 

“What d’ye think of that, now?” said Phil. 

Paul reached over, and took possession of the 
coin. 

“Did you find that. Bobolink?” he asked, for 
sometimes the other was known to play tricks. 

“ I sure did, Paul, right like this,” and stoop- 
ing over. Bobolink was about to pretend to pick 
up something when he uttered a gasp. 

“Another one!” 

He was holding a second coin in his hand, the 


A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE 199 


exact duplicate, so far as they could see, of the 
first one. 

“Must grow here in flocks!” exclaimed Phil; 
“ let’s see if we can dig up a whole bunch of ’em, 
boys 1 ” But although they all started digging 
with the toes of their shoes, no more shining 
coins came to light; and it began to look as if 
Bobolink had been fortunate enough to pick up 
all there were. 

Paul closely examined the two bright quarters. 

“ If those are queer ones then they’d fool me 
all right, let me tell you ! ” declared Bobolink. 

“ I never saw better in my life,” Paul admitted. 

The boys were looking pretty serious by now. 
It began to seem as though that guess made by 
one of their number could not have been so wide 
of the mark as at the time some of them believed. 
Here was pretty strong evidence that these men 
were engaged in manufacturing spurious coins. 

Ought they to consider they had gone far 
enough, and give up the exploration of the island, 
returning home to sound the alarm, and send 
word to the authorities, so that these men might 
be trapped as they worked? 

Paul was tempted to consider that his duty 
lay that way. Still, there were some things that 
puzzled him, and made him hesitate before con- 
cluding to follow that idea. 

Why should they keep the forge out here in 


200 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


the open, when some shelter would seem to be 
the proper thing, if, as the scouts now believed, 
they were using the fire to smelt metals, and 
blend them to the proper consistency for the bad 
coins? 

That was something that puzzled Paul greatly. 
It caused him to look around in the neighborhood 
of the forge, in the hope that he might pick up 
some other clue. 

The ground was pretty well trampled over, as 
though a number of men had been walking back 
and forth many times in their occupation, what- 
ever it could have been. Paul also saw a number 
of indentations in the earth, which made him 
think some heavy object had rested in that open 
space. 

“ Whatever they brought here,” remarked 
Jack, presently, “it looks like they must have used 
some sort of vehicle to carry it; because these 
tracks have the appearance of ruts made by 
wheels.” 

“Rubber tires, too,” added Phil. “IVe seen 
too many of ’em not to know; for my father has 
a garage.” 

“Is that so?” exclaimed Bobolink, shaking his 
head, as if to say that with each discovery the 
mystery, instead of getting lighter, only grew 
more dense. 

“And look how close together they seem to 


A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE 201 

be, would you; a pretty narrow bed for a wagon, 
don’t it seem?” asked Tom Betts. 

“ But they run off that way,” observed Bobo- 
link, “and there are so many of the tracks you 
can hardly tell which are mates. There’s Paul 
followin’ ’em up; reckon we’d better keep with 
him, boys. We don’t want to get separated.” 

Paul soon came to a stop, and was joined by 
the others. 

“Queer how the marks all seem to knock off 
about here,” he remarked, pointing to the ground. 
“You can’t find one further on. And it isn’t that 
the ground suddenly gets hard, either. This looks 
the queerest thing of them all. What do they 
run that thing with wheels up and down here 
for? Anybody know?” 

But silence was the only answer he received, 
since every one of the six other scouts seemed 
to be scratching his head, and wrinkling his fore- 
head, as though deep in thought, yet unable to 
see light. 

So they went back to the field forge, to look 
around again, though their labor was all they 
had for their pains. 

“Not even another lovely quarter to be picked 
up where it got spilled when they made ’em here, 
p’raps by the bushel,” grumbled Bobolink, 
scratching the earth with his toe in vain. 

He had recovered the coins from Paul, and 


202 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


jingled them in his pocket; though the envious 
Bluff warned him that they might get him into a 
peck of trouble, should he be caught by Secret 
Service men. 

“Huhl guess you think you c’n scare me into 
droppin’ them,” declared Bobolink, thrusting out 
his chin at Bluff. “Let me know if you see me 
doin’ it; will you? I c’n just see you falling all 
over yourself, tryin’ to grab these dandy coins, 
if I let ’em slip by me. Shoot a ball up another 
alley. Bluff. Go hunt a fortune for yourself, and 
don’t want to grab mine. Hands off, see?” 

“ Do we go back now, Paul; or had we better 
keep on to the hill?” Jack asked, as though he 
knew the other must have been settling this im- 
portant matter in his mind. 

“ I think as we’ve come this far, with the hill 
just ahead of us, it would be a disappointment not 
to get up to that cedar tree,” Paul replied; at 
which every one of the other scouts nodded his 
head. 

“W-w-want to s-s-see what the old p-p-place 
1-1-looks like,” remarked Bluff, in his positive way. 

“ And there’s no use in our staying around here 
any longer, either, I should think,” ventured Phil. 
“How do we know but what some of the men 
may just happen to butt in on us, while we’re 
looking their old forge over? And if they did, 
I just guess they’d make things hum for us. So 


A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE 203 

I say, into the woods again for me — the sooner 
the better.” 

“ I hope we’re doing the right thing by keeping 
on,” Paul observed, looking at his companions in 
a way they took as an invitation to back him up. 

“ Who’s got a better right to go wnere we feel 
like?” demanded Bobolink. 

“ Honest men wouldn’t have any kick coming, 
just because a troop of Boy Scouts happened to 
camp on their island; and it only goes to show 
they’re doing something shady, that’s what. I say 
go on,” Phil gave as his opinion. 

Jack, Andy, Bluff and Tom were quick to de- 
clare themselves opposed to any change of plan, 
at least, until after they had reached their goal, 
which was the foot of the cedar on top of the 
hill. 

This decision seemed to give Paul more heart, 
and when they left the open space he cast a last 
glance back at it, as though still puzzled. 

The trees grew even more dense as they drew 
nearer the foot of that peculiar rise in the ground 
which went to make up what they called a hill. 
Indeed, the boys were astonished to find such an 
almost impenetrable jungle. 

“ Isn’t that some sort of shack you can see over 
yonder?” asked Phil, presently. 

As the rest looked, they agreed that it looked 


204 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


like a rude shelter, made out of branches, and 
some boards fastened together in a crude way. 

There was no sign of life about the place, and 
after making sure of this the scouts grew bold 
enough to advance upon it from what seemed to 
be the reSf, though this could be settled only by 
the fact that the entrance to the rustic hut ap- 
peared to be on the other side. 

Creeping noiselessly up until they were along- 
side the shelter, the scouts set about finding loop- 
holes through which they might obtain a glimpse 
of what lay on the other side of those frail walls. 

Then one by one they drew back, and the looks 
they cast at each other indicated that what they 
had seen was not a pleasant sight 


CHAPTER XXII 


THE WIGWAG MESSAGE 

The other side of the rough shack was partly 
open, so that considerable light managed to gain 
admittance. This had enabled the scouts to see 
a figure lying on some old blankets, together with 
the skins of several animals. 

It was without doubt the wild man who had 
given some of their troop such a bad scare when 
he turned up near the camp soon after their ar- 
rival on the island. 

He seemed to be sound asleep, and none of 
them were at all anxious to make any sound cal- 
culated to arouse him. Indeed, more than one put 
a finger to his lips to indicate that they were 
sealed, as he turned and looked anxiously at his 
comrades. 

Paul made motions to let them know It would 
be just as well if they quit the vicinity of that 
queer shack, where the crazy man, as they now 
deemed him, had his home. 

A few minutes later, when they had put enough 
distance between themselves and the rude shelter 
205 


2o6 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


to permit conversation, Bobolink could no longer 
keep his opinions to himself. 

“ He was a jim-dandy, all right, and a genuine 
wild man of the woods! ” he remarked. “What 
are the circus fellows thinkin’ of, to let such a 
fine chance slip by to get a real ‘ What-is-it,’ 
fresh from the jungles of Borneo, half man, and 
the rest gorilla?” 

“And he had Nuthin’s dog, after all,” ob- 
served Paul, quietly. 

“What makes you say that, Paul?” asked 
Jack. 

“ Because, in the first place, I saw a lot of bones, 
picked as clean as a whistle, lying on the ground 
over in a corner. Then there was a lair that 
looked as if an animal slept in It. And if that 
wasn’t enough, I noticed a piece of broken rope 
fastened to a stake, close by that corner. You 
remember I said the dog was dragging a piece of 
rope around with him, when he came creeping 
up near our camp last night? He broke away, 
all right; and I guess the wild man will be minus 
his dog after this.” 

“Well, that’s one thing settled,” asserted Phil. 
“We know now, for sure, there is a wild man up 
here; and some of the officers will have to come 
and capture him. My father is one of the county 
freeholders, and he’s overseer of the poor in the 
bargain; so I suppose it’ll be up to him to carry 


THE WIGWAG MESSAGE 


207 


out the job. They can’t afford to have people say 
there’s a crazy wild man at large, in our district, 
you see.” 

“ Did any of you notice that there was a rude 
sort of table in the shack?” asked Paul, as they 
kept on moving forward, wondering if a third 
discovery m.ight be made at any minute. 

“ Well, now, that’s a fact,” replied Bobolink. 
“ I did see that, but somehow didn’t think it queer 
at the time, not enough to mention it, anyhow. 
But come to think of it, it was kind of out of 
the way in the shack of a wild man, ch?” 

“ There was something on the table that would 
seem stranger, if you’d noticed it. I saw a bat- 
tered old coffeepot there ! ” observed Paul, smil- 
ing grimly. 

“What?'' ejaculated Bobolink. “A wild man 
liking coffee! Where d’ye suppose he gets the 
roasted bean? It don’t grow on the bushes up 
here; and he sure don’t look as if he had the 
cash to buy it. Oh 1 p’raps they use him to pass 
some of this bogus coin they make! Mebbe he 
goes to towns, and buys their supplies, all the 
time they’re workin’ like beavers up here, makin’ 
the stuff.” 

“ I don’t just agree with you there, Bobolink,” 
said Paul. “In the first place, as Phil will tell 
you, if such a scarecrow ever came into Stanhope, 
or any other town in the country, the officers 


2o8 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


would be sure to arrest him, and examine him 
to see if he oughtn’t to be shut up in the asylum. 
If he got the old pot and the coffee to go with 
it from these men, then it was in the nature of 
a bribe not to interfere with their business, as 
they wanted to stay here on his Island.” 

“Great brain, Paul; you seem to hit the right 
idea every time. And chances are, that’s just 
what happened,” Bobolink remarked. 

“That dog didn’t come back,” observed Tom 
Betts. 

“And therefore he’s still loose,” added Phil, 
uneasily. “ Hope we don’t run across the beggar 
again; but if we should, remember Paul, the coun- 
try expects you to do your duty. You must bag 
him, no matter what noise you have to make doing 
it.” 

“Leave that to me,” remarked the scout mas- 
ter. “Now that we know pretty well how the 
land lies, and whose dog it is, perhaps I won’t be 
so squeamish about shooting the beast if the 
chance comes along.” 

“Here’s the foot of the rise,” Jack broke in. 

“ And the trees grow more thin as the ground 
ascends, you notice,” Paul went on. He called 
their attention to all such things, because he was 
acting as scout master of the troop, and it seemed 
to him that he should not allow any chance to pass 


THE WIGWAG MESSAGE 209 

whereby he might enlarge the horizon of scout 
lore of the lads under him. 

“Then it strikes me that we ought to be a bit 
careful not to show ourselves too plain, as we 
go up,” Jack suggested. 

“You’re right,” added Bobolink. “For all we 
know, these fellows may have a lookout in a tree, 
as well as we have, and he’d see us if we got care- 
less. That means we must dodge along, taking 
advantage of every sort of shelter that crops up. 
Great fun, boys, and for one I’m just tickled to 
death over the chance to prove that we learned 
our little lesson O. K.” 

All were presently stooping at one moment, 
where the bushes grew sparse ; crawling in among 
some sheltering rocks at another, and even get- 
ting down to wriggle along like so many snakes, 
when not even so much as a bush offered a means 
of hiding from observation, in case hostile eyes 
happened to be turned upwards toward the hill- 
top at the foot of the lone cedar. 

It was not a great distance to cover, and before 
long they found themselves close to their goal. 

Already could they see over the southern side 
of the island; and after they gained the cedar 
it would probably be easy to also survey the north- 
ern half, the part which doubtless held more of 
interest to them than any other, since they had 


210 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


reason to believe that the mysterious dwellers on 
the isle were somewhere there. 

“ Five more minutes will do it,” remarked Paul, 
when they had gathered in a shallow depression 
which afforded shelter until they caught their 
breath again for another climb. 

Paul was looking hard at something far be- 
yond the lake. Bobolink, of course, being at- 
tracted by his scrutiny, also allowed his gaze to 
wander in that quarter; but all he saw was what 
he took to be a buzzard, almost out of sight — a 
dim speck In the heavens, and about to pass out 
of sight altogether where clouds hovered above 
the southern horizon. 

“ I c’n see about where our camp Is,” Phil was 
saying, “and I think I know which tree the sig- 
nal corps is stationed in. Anyhow, I seem to 
glimpse something white moving among the green 
leaves, which, I take It, Is a flag being held ready 
to wave at us.” 

“ I reckon Paul will soon let ’em know we’re 
still on the map,” observed Bobolink. “ But won’t 
they be s’prised when they learn that we saw the 
terrible wild man In his own den; and ran across 
the plant where those rascals make their bogus 
coin, that looks as bright and good as any Uncle 
Sam stamps out?” 

Just then the leader gave the signal for an- 


THE WIGWAG MESSAGE 21 1 

other advance, and the six scouts who followed 
set about completing the last leg of the climb. 

They finally found themselves at the roots of 
the cedar tree that crowned the elevation, and 
which proved of a size far beyond what any of 
the scouts had imagined. 

“Well, here we are at last,” said Phil, breath- 
ing hard after his exertions. 

“And,” added Bobolink, also badly winded, 
though he would chatter; “now to see Paul get 
one of the other fellows on the line, to wig his 
wag at us, or do something that sounds that way. 
There he goes at it. And looky there, they’ve 
been watching us climb, I reckon, because almost 
before Paul made the first sign, that other fellow 
began sendin’.” 

They watched the fluttering red flag with the 
white centre. Some of them had taken more or 
less interest in sending and receiving messages; 
but the boy in the tree proved too fast for any 
of them to follow. They suspected that it was 
Jud Elderkin himself; for outside of Paul and 
Jack, he was the best hand at that sort of thing. 

“ My stars I he keeps right along doing it; don’t 
he?” muttered Bobolink. 

“ Must be some message, too, believe me,” 
added Phil. 

“ N-n-now, what d’ye s-s-suppose has happened 
at c-c-camp since we q-q-quit?” remarked BluflF, 


212 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

anxiously waiting for the message to be trans- 
lated. 

Not once did Paul break in on the sending of 
the message. He sat there, close to the base of 
the big cedar which sheltered his back from the 
north side of the island; and seemed to be wholly 
engrossed in transcribing the various signs of the 
flag code. 

They could not see the boy in the branches 
of the tree; but from their elevated position the 
white and red flag was in plain view. Up and 
down, and crosswise, it continued to write its 
message, that was doubtless like printed letters to 
Paul and Jack, while unintelligible to those who 
had never taken lessons in wigwagging. 

Finally came the well known sign that the mes- 
sage was done; and that the sender awaited the 
wishes of the party with whom he was in com- 
munication. 

Paul turned upon his comrades. They saw 
that the frown had come back again to his usually 
smooth forehead, as though he had learned some- 
thing to add to the perplexities of the problem 
they were trying so diligently to solve. 

“ It’s Jud,” he said, simply, “ and he’s just sent 
an astonishing message. This is the way it ran, 
boys: ‘Presence here known. Man in aeroplane 
passed over camp. Went down lake half hour 
ago. Out of sight now. Answer I’” 


THE WIGWAG MESSAGE 


213 


No wonder Bobolink fairly held his breath, and 
the other five scouts looked at each other, as 
though they could hardly believe their ears. For 
a full minute they sat there and stared; while Bob- 
olink remembered the far-away black object that, 
at the time, he had thought to be a buzzard. 


CHAPTER XXIII 


STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE 

*‘WheeI^' 

It was, of course, Bobolink who gave utterance 
to this characteristic exclamation. 

Like most of the others, he had been so stunned 
by the message read by Paul, that for the moment 
he failed to find words to express his feelings. 

An aeroplane had passed over the camp I And 
heading south, which would take it toward the 
quarter where Stanhope lay! 

Here they had thought themselves so far re- 
moved from civilization that the only persons 
within a range of miles might be set down as a 
wild man and some lawless counterfeiters, who 
had chosen this region because of its inaccessi- 
bility. 

And now they had learned that one of the lat- 
est inventions of the day had been moving above 
the island, with the pilot actually looking down on * 
the camp, and so discovering the fact of the Boy 
Scouts having returned after their banishment 
from the place. 


214. 


STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE 215 


No wonder they all stared at each other, and 
that speech was denied them for a time. 

Jack was the first to speak. He had read the 
message, being nearly as good a signalman as Paul 
or Jud. 

“Things seem to be picking up at a pretty 
lively clip for us; eh, fellows?’* was the way he 
put it. 

“ Picking up?” gasped Bobolink; “ Seems to me 
they’re getting to the red hot stage about as fast 
as they can. An aeroplane 1 And up here on our 
desert island at that, which folks said was given 
over to spooks and wild men I That is the limit, 
sure! Hold me, somebody; I think I’m going to 
faint! ” 

But as nobody made any piovement in that di- 
rection, Bobolink changed hi4^mind. 

“ Let’s look into this thing a little closer, fel- 
lows,” said Paul, always prompt to set an inves- 
tigation going. 

“That’s what!” echoed Bluff, siff^ising him- 
self by not stammering a particle, even though 
he was still quivering with excitement. 

“Jud says an aeroplane passed over the camp; 
but he didn’t tell whether it rose from the island 
or not, though the chances are that it did,” Paul 
continued. 

“Why do you say that as if you felt sure?’* 
demanded Tom Betts. 


2i6 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


“Yes,” put in Phil, eagerly, “you’ve got on to 
something, Paul; give us a chance to grab It, too, 
please.” 

“ Sure I will,” complied the scout master, cheer- 
fully. “And I’m only surprised that one of you, 
always so quick to see such things, hasn’t jumped 
on to this little game as soon as I have. Look 
back a short time, and you’ll remember how we 
were scratching our heads over the tracks of 
wheels down in that big opening! ” 

“Wheels!” exclaimed Bobolink, with fresh ex- 
citement. “Well, I should say yes; and looks to 
me like we had ’em in our heads too, where the 
brains ought to be. Wheels, yes, and rubber-tired 
wheels too ! Remember how they seemed to run 
up and down a regular track, and just went so 
far, when they gave out? Whoop! why, it’s as 
easy as two and two make four. Anybody ought 
to have guessed that.” 

“Huh!” remarked Tom Betts, scornfully; 
“that’s what they said, you recollect, when Co- 
lumbus discovered America. After you know, 
everything looks easy. In my mind Paul goes 
up head. He’s in a class by himself.” 

“And that forge might have been used, among 
other things, for doing all sorts of mending metal 
pieces connected with an aeroplane,” Paul went 
on, smiling at Tom’s tribute of praise. 

“Not forgetting these sort of things,” Bobo- 


STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE 217 


link observed, positively, as he took out a pair 
of bright new quarters, and jingled them musi- 
cally in his hand. 

“Well, we haven’t had any reason to change 
our minds about that thing, — yet,” said Paul. 
“ But what strikes me as the queerest of all is the 
fact that while we must have been pretty close 
by when that aeroplane went up, how was it none 
of us heard the throbbing of the engine?” 

They looked at each other in bewilderment. 
Paul’s query had opened up a vast field of con- 
jecture. One and all shook their heads. ^ 

“ I pass,” declared Tom. 

“ Me too,” added Phil. 

“ Must ’a got some new kind of motor aboard 
that is silent,” suggested Jack. 

“J-j-just a-goin’ to s-s-say that, when Jack 
t-t-took the w-w-words out of m-m-my 
m-m-mouth,” Bluff exploded. 

“ No trouble doin’ that. Bluff,” laughed Bobo- 
link. “ If that aeroplane did climb up out of 
that field, while we pushed through the heavy 
timber, and none of us heard a thing, let me tell 
you, boys, they’ve got a cracker-jack of a motor, 
that’s what I” 

“ But arrah I would ye be thinkin’ that a lot 
of bog-trottin’ counterfeiters’d be havin’ a rale 
aeroplane?” burst out Andy Flinn, who had up 


2i8 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


to now been unable to give any expression to his 
feelings. 

“ I’d say these fellers must be a pretty tony 
lot, that’s all,” Bobolink declared. 

“Whatever do you suppose they use such a 
machine for?” asked Tom. 

Again all eyes were turned upon Paul, as the 
oracle of the group of wondering scouts. He 
shrugged his shoulders, as if he thought he had 
as much right as any of the others to admit that 
he was puzzled. 

“Well, we’d have to make a stab at guessing 
that,” he observed. “Any one thing of half a 
dozen might be the truth. An aeroplane could 
be used for carrying the stuff they make up here 
to a distant market. Then again, it might be only 
a sort of plaything, or hobby, of the chief money- 
maker; something he amuses himself with, to take 
his mind off business. All men have hobbies — 
fishing, hunting, horse racing, golf — why couldn’t 
this chap take to flying for his fun?” 

“That sounds good to me,” declared Bobo- 
link; “anyhow, we know he must be a kind of 
high-flier.” 

“Seems like our mystery bulges bigger than 
ever,” remarked Phil, frowning. 

“It does, for a fact,” admitted Tom; “instead 
of finding out things, we’re getting deeper in the 
mud all the time.” 


STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE 219 

“Oh! I don’t know,” Paul said, musingly; and 
although the rest instantly turned upon him, fully 
expecting that the scout master would have some 
sort of communication to make, he did not think 
it worth while, at that time, to explain what he 
meant. 

“ Say, I wonder, now, if we could see any- 
thing of those fellows from up here?” remarked 
Bobolink, suddenly. 

“That’s so,” echoed Phil, perceiving what the 
other intended to convey; “we can see the whole 
of the island now; and if they’re camped some- 
where on the north end, perhaps we might get a 
glimpse of canvas.” 

“What makes you think these men have their 
headquarters on the north end, rather than any- 
where else?” asked Paul, quickly. 

“Why, when we got up here, I noticed that 
smoke was climbing up over there; and smoke 
means a fire; which also tells that some person 
must be around to look after it,” replied Phil, 
promptly. 

“Pretty good reasoning,” said Paul, nodding 
his head toward Phil; for if anything gave him 
pleasure as scout master of the troop, it was to 
see a boy using his head. 

All now looked over the crown of the hill, to- 
ward the upper end of the island. The first thing 
they saw, of course, was the thin column of 


220 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


smoke which Phil had mentioned. Then Bobo- 
link burst out with: 

“And you were right, Paul, when you said 
that the chances were the island was close to the 
north side of the lake, so animals could swim 
across. Why, only a narrow streak of water 
separates ’em there, sure enough.” 

“ Oh ! that was only a guess on my part,” Paul 
confessed. “ I saw about how far away the main- 
land trended up there, and supposed that our 
island must run near it in places. I’m pleased 
to see that I hit the mark, for once at least, in 
this mixed-up' mess.” 

Paul was evidently more or less provoked be- 
cause he had been unable to understand many of 
the strange things that had happened since their 
arrival on Cedar Island. And the others knew 
that he was taking himself to task because of his 
dullness; but what of them, if the scout master 
needed to be wakened up — where did they come 
in? 

“ I can’t be sure about it,” observed Phil, who 
had been looking intently at one particular spot; 
“but it seems as if I could make out the roof of 
a shed of some kind, over yonder, close to where 
the smoke rises.” 

This set them all to looking again. Andy, who 
had very good eyes, declared he could make it 
out, and that it was a roof of some kind; one or 


STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE 221 


two of the others, after their attention had been 
called to the spot, also admitted that it did look 
a little that way, though they could not say for a 
certainty^ 

“Anyhow, I reckon that’s where these men 
live,” Paul declared; “and now the question is, 
are we going to turn back here; or keep right 
on exploring this queer old Cedar Island?” 

Bobolink, who was busy cutting his initials in 
the bark of the big cedar that topped the squatty 
hill, spoke first of all; for being an impetuous 
fellow, he seldom thought twice before airing his 
opinions. 

“ Me to push right on,” he said. “What dif- 
ference does it make to us that some other fel- 
lows chance to be camping on the same island? 
It’s free to all. We aren’t going to bother them 
one whit, if only they leave us alone. But they 
began wrong, you see, when they told us to get 
off the earth. That riled me. I never did like 
to be sat on by anybody. It just seems like some- 
thing inside gets to workin’ overtime, and all my 
badness begins to rise up, like mom’s yeast in a 
batch of dough. Count my vote to go on ahead, 
Paul.” 

“Well, who’s next?” asked the scout master 
“ and remember, that when it comes to a matter 
like this, I always try and do what the majority 
wants.” 


222 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


“I’m willing to do what the rest say,” came 
from Jack. 

“Go right on, and make a clean job of it,” 
said Tom Betts, grimly. 

“S-s-same here!” jerked out Bluff. 

“ That spakes my mind to a dot, so it do,” Andy 
followed. 

Paul threw up his hand. 

“Enough said; that makes four in favor al- 
ready, and settles the matter. I won’t tell you 
which way I would have voted, because the thing’s 
been taken from my hands. And besides, I would 
only have considered your welfare in making my 
decision, and not my own desire.” 

“Which manes he would have said yis for 
himsilf, and no for the rist of us, “declared the 
Irish boy, exultantly; “so it’s glad I am we’ve 
made up our minds to go on. Whin do we shtart, 
Paul, darlint?” 

“ Right away,” replied the one addressed. 
“There’s no use staying any longer up here, un- 
less you think I’d better get Jud again, and wig- 
wag him all that we’ve learned up to now.” 

“ It’ll keep,” said Phil, hastily, for he wanted 
to see the faces of those other scouts when the 
several astonishing pieces of news were told; es- 
pecially about the finding of the real wild man 
asleep, the discovery of the field forge in the open 
glade and the picking up of the two silver quar* 


STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE 223 


ters, which last he felt sure would give them all 
a surprise. 

“All right!” the scout master announced, “I 
think pretty much the same way; and besides, it 
would take a long while sending all that news. 
But perhaps I ought to let the boys know weVe 
going on further; and that they needn’t expect 
us much before the middle of the afternoon. 
That’ll give us plenty of time to roam around, 
and perhaps come back another way.” 

So he started once more to catch the attention 
of Jud, perched high up in that tree above the 
sink near the lower end of the island, where he 
could have an uninterrupted view of the cedar on 
the top of the hill. 

Then there was a fluttering of the signal flag 
and briefly the scout master informed the other 
as to what their intentions were. 

“That job’s done,” Paul remarked, presently, 
when Jud replied with a gesture that implied his 
understanding the message; “and now to move 
down-hill again. We’re taking some big chances 
in what we’re expecting to do, fellows, and I only 
hope it won’t prove a mistake. Come along!” 


CHAPTER XXIV 


THE DISCOVERY 

“There^s one thing that I think we haven’t 
bothered our heads much about, Paul,” remarked 
Jack, just before they quitted the vicinity of the 
big cedar on top of the hill. 

“What?” asked Bobolink, cocking his head on 
one side to see how well his initials looked in the 
bark of the tree from which Cedar Island took 
its name; and which would tell later explorers 
that others had been there ahead of them. 

“ Why, it seems to me those clouds down there 
on the southern horizon have a look that spells 
storm,” Jack continued. 

“Wow I wonder if we will strike another rainy 
spell?” said Bobolink, so quickly that none of 
the others had a chance to get a word in; “that 
last one helped us get out of the mud in the 
canal; if another comes will it be as accommo- 
datin’, or turn on us, and whoop things up, car- 
rying our tents away over the island, and losing 
’em in the swamps beyond there?” 

“Oh I say, don’t imagine so much, Bobolink,” 

224 


THE DISCOVERY 


225 


Interrupted Phil. ‘‘You’re the greatest fellow I 
ever saw for figuring all sorts of bad things out 
long before they ever get a chance to start. What 
Jack means is, will we be apt to get caught in 
the rain, and be soaked?” 

“That’s the main thing,” added Tom Betts, 
who was rather particular about how his khaki 
suit looked on him, for Tom was a bit of a 
“ dresser,” as some of the others, less careful with 
regard to their looks, called it. 

“ I’ve noticed that it’s grown pretty close and 
muggy,” Paul went on. 

“ I should say it had,” added Bobolink. “ I 
kept moppin’ my face most of the way up the rise. 
Thought we’d sure get a fine breeze after reachin’ 
the top; but nixey, nothing doing. It’s as dead 
as a door nail; or Julius Caesar ever was. Yes, 
that spells rain before night. I’d like to risk my 
reputation as a weather prophet in saying.” 

“Still, we go on?” Paul asked. 

“Well, we’d be a fine lot of scouts,” blurted 
out Bobolink, “ if the chance of getting our backs 
wet made us give up a plan we’d decided on.” 

“Lead the way, Paul; they’re bent on finding 
out something more about these men. And feel- 
ing that way, as Bobolink says, a little rain storm 
wouldn’t make them change their minds,” and 
Jack, while speaking, started after the scout mas- 
ter, who had commenced to descend the hill. 


226 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


They did not immediately turn toward the north 
side. There seemed no use in deliberately mak- 
ing their presence known to any one stationed 
over at the north end of the island, providing the 
mysterious men were not already aware of it. 

Paul, when doing his wigwag act, had been 
careful to keep the crest of the hill between his 
flag and that suspicious quarter where the smoke 
column was lazily creeping up, as smoke has a 
habit of doing just before rain comes. 

Of course it might be possible that the man 
in the aeroplane, after discovering the tents in 
the sink, may have made some sort of signal that 
would tell his comrades the fact of the scouts 
having returned in the night. 

Paul wished, now that it was too late, he had 
thought to ask Jud about that point. It might be 
of some benefit to them to know whether the men 
were aware of their presence; or rested serene 
in the belief that they were the only occupants of 
the island, besides the wild man. 

After the scouts had gone down a little way, 
Paul began to change his course. He was now 
turning toward the north. The trees grew much 
more thickly here, and would surely screen them 
from observation. 

The boys had resumed their former habit of 
observing everything that came in their way, as 
true scouts always should. They turned their 


THE DISCOVERY 


227 


heads from right to left and Bobolink even looked 
back of him more than a few times. Perhaps he 
remembered that there was a wild man at large 
who might take a notion to awake from his sleep, 
and, discovering the scout patrol, think it his busi- 
ness to follow them. 

And then, to be sure, they ought to keep in 
mind the fact concerning that wild dog that had 
gone back to the habits of Its ancestors, preferring 
to live by hunting, rather than take food from the 
hand of man. It would be far from pleasant to 
have old Lion suddenly sneak up on them, and 
give them a scare. 

But everything seemed peaceful around them. 
Now and then a bird would fly out of a thicket, 
or give a little burst of song from the branch 
of some tree. A red-headed woodpecker tapped 
boisterously on the dead top of a beech near by, 
trying hard to arouse the curiosity of the worms 
that lived there, so as to cause them to poke out 
their heads to see who was so noisy at their front 
doors; when of course the feathered hammerer 
stood ready to gobble them up. 

“ Oh ! ” gasped Bobolink, when there was a 
sudden whirring sound of wings, and they had a 
furtive glimpse of something flashing through the 
undergrowth near by. 

“It’s only a partridge; don’t be worried I” re- 
marked Phil. 


228 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


“ Sure it was,** muttered Bobolink, with scorn ; 
“ any fellow with only one eye’d know that tiow; 
but all the same, the thing gave me a bad turn, 
Fm that keyed up.” 

“And that’s a cotton-tail looking at us over 
yonder, so don’t throw another fit when he takes 
a notion to skip out,” Phil continued, pointing with 
his cudgel to where a rabbit sat, observing the 
intruders, as though wondering what business any 
human beings had coming to the island that had 
been left alone so long. 

Presently the little animal skipped off a few 
paces and then stopped again. As the scouts ad- 
vanced, it repeated these tactics; indeed, so tame 
did it seem that any of them could have easily 
hit the rabbit with a stone, had they felt so in- 
clined, which, as scouts, they could not think of 
doing. 

“Looks like she’s got a litter of young ones 
close by here,” said Bobolink; “and is playing 
lame just to lead us away from the bunch. Fve 
seen rabbits do that before now. The cuteness 
of the thing I Look at her, would you, just beg- 
gin’ us to run after, and try to capture her?” 

“ Fve seen a partridge act as if she had a 
broken wing,” Jack remarked, quietly; “and flut- 
ter along the ground in a way that couldn’t help 
but make one try to catch her; but if you chased 


THE DISCOVERY 


229 

after her, it would be to see the old bird take 
wing pretty soon, and go off like a rocket.” 

“ Same here,” declared Paul; “ and going back, 
I flushed a whole covey of the prettiest little birds 
you ever saw. They’d been crouching under a 
bush while the old one played lame; just as if 
she’d told them all about it. But I heard her 
calling in the brush later on, and of course she 
got them all together again.” 

“There goes your lame rabbit now. Bobolink; 
and say, look at the way she jumps over the 
ground,” remarked Phil, chuckling. 

“Not so loud, boys,” cautioned the scout mas- 
ter. “These things are all mighty Interesting; 
but we mustn’t forget what we’re here for nor 
yet the fact that we’ve got a pretty good hunch 
there are some men close by who would be just 
as mad as hops if they knew we meant to stalk 
their camp and spy on them. If you have to 
say anything, whisper It softly, remember.” 

At that they all fell silent. It was true that 
they had forgotten. for the moment that they were 
doing scouting work; and under such conditions 
talking was not allowed, especially above the low- 
est tone. 

All of them noticed that it was getting very 
close now, for they had to use the red bandanna 
handkerchiefs they carried, and quite frequently 


230 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


at that, to wipe away the perspiration that oozed 
from their foreheads. 

“Lucky we left our coats in camp; isn’t it?” 
remarked Phil. 

“Looks that way now, but if that rain does 
strike us, we may wish we had ’em on,” Tom 
Betts replied; showing that he at least had not 
been able to put out of his head the possibility 
of a storm. 

“ Seems to me we must be getting somewhere,” 
Phil observed. 

“It can’t be very much further,” Paul an- 
swered, feeling that the remark was addressed to 
him as the pilot of the expedition.” 

“ I should say not,” came from Bluff, as chip- 
per as a bird’s song, and without the least sign 
of halt or break; “ if we go on much more, we’ll 
walk off the end of the island.” 

Bobolink patted him on the back, as if to en- 
courage him in well doing. 

“That’s the stuff. Bluff; you c’n do it when 
you try,” he whispered; “but as to steppin’ into 
the lake, I guess we aren’t that near the north 
end yet, by a good sight.” 

Paul nodded his head, but said nothing; from 
that Bobolink knew the scout master agreed with 
him. They could go considerably longer without 
being halted by coming to the water’s edge. 


THE DISCOVERY 


231 

Jack called the attention of his chums just then 
to something ahead. 

“ Seems to me I smell smoke,” he said, “ and 
if you bend down here, so you can look under the 
branches of the trees, you’ll see something that’s 
got the shape of a shed, or cabin, off yonder.” 

The others, upon making a try, agreed with 
Jack that it did seem that way. 

“ Oh I we’re right on top of the nest, all right,” 
chattered Bobolink, but showing his wisdom by 
keeping his voice down to its lowest note; “and 
now, if we c’n duplicate that little dodge we played 
at the shack of the wild man, it’s goin’ to be as 
easy as turning over off a spring-board, with a 
ten foot drop.” 

“ But if we’re caught we might get shot at,” 
suggested Phil, as if the idea had struck him for 
the first time that they were really playing with 
fire, in thus bearding desperate lawbreakers in 
their den. 

“We aren’t going to get caught,” said Bobo- 
link; “who’s afraid? Not I. Lead along, Paul. 
I want to get this thing out pf my system, so I 
c’n have a little rest up here,” and he placed a 
hand on his brow. 

Although himself doubtful as to the wisdom 
of the move, Paul could not back down now, after 
allowing the boys to vote on the matter. Perhaps 
he was more or less sorry that at the time he 


232 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


had not exercised his privilege as scout master 
to put his foot down on their taking any more 
chances, just to satisfy such curiosity as reckless 
fellows like Bobolink migh/. feel, with regard to 
the unknown men. 

It was too late now. Until some of the boys 
themselves manifested a desire to call the retreat, 
he must go on; although it began to seem more 
than ever audacious — this creeping up on a den 
of men who were hiding from the eye of the law 
in order to carry on their nefarious trade. 

And so they started to creep forward, now 
dodging behind trees, and crawling back of 
friendly patches of bushes whenever the chance 
presented itself. It was all exciting enough, to 
be sure, and doubtless gave the boys many a de- 
lightful little thrill. 

In this fashion they came upon a larger clump 
of trees and bushes, which, instead of trying to 
round, they concluded to pass through. 

It was just as they gained a point inside this 
clump that they were brought up with a round 
turn by discovering a couple of objects standing 
there, as though they had been left behind when 
the valuable contents which they formerly en- 
cased had been taken out. 

These were two large packing cases, of unusual 
shape, and made of heavy planed boards I 

Some of the scouts looked at them carelessly, 


THE DISCOVERY 


233 


for to them these objects did not carry any par- 
ticular meaning. Not so Jack, Tom Betts and 
Bobolink. Those three boys had received a shock, 
as severe as it was unexpected. 

They recognized those cases as being the iden- 
tical ones which had only lately reposed snugly 
in the planing mill of Jack’s father in Stanhope, 
and to guard which one Hans Waggoner had been 
hired by the man who owned them. Professor 
Hackett! And as they stood there and gaped, 
doubtless among the many things that flashed into 
the minds of those three lads was the fact that 
somebody had been trying to get to see what the 
contents of those mysterious cases might be; 
which person they now knew must have been a 
Government Secret Service man, a detective from 
Washington, on the track of the bold counter- 
feiting gang! 

All these things, and much more, flashed 
through the minds of Jack and his chums, as they 
stood there in that thicket, and stared hard at the 
two big cases bound around with twisted wire, but 
which had now been relieved of their unknown 
contents, for they stood empty. 

And the others, realizing that something had 
occurred out of the regular channel, waited for 
them to speak, and explain what they had dis- 
covered. 


CHAPTER XXV 


TIME TO GO BACK 

“What is it, Bobolink — Jack?** asked the 
scout master. 

“The boxes yonder!** Bobolink managed to 
exclaim. 

“ You evidently have seen them before; tell me, 
Jack, are they the ones you said your father stored 
for that man?** continued Paul. 

“They certainly look mighty like them,’* re- 
plied the other; “and you know, they were taken 
away that morning early. They must have been 
carried across country to the shore of the lake, 
and then ferried over in a rowboat. That was 
what we saw the marks of, and the four men 
walked off with these between them.” 

“Wheel did you ever?” gasped the still be- 
wildered Bobolink. “Yes, here you c*n see the 
markin’ on the lid they threw away when they 
opened this one — * Professor Hackett, In care of 
John Stormways, Stanhope,* all as plain as any- 
thing. And to think how after all my worryin* 
234 


TIME TO GO BACK 


235 


the old boxes have bobbed up here. Don’t it beat 
the Dutch how things turn out?” 

That seemed to be the one thing that gripped 
Bobolink’s attention — the strange way in which 
those two heavy boxes with the twisted wire bind- 
ing had happened to cross his path again. 

But Paul was thinking of other things, that 
might have a more serious bearing on the case. 
He turned to Jack again. 

“What do you know about this so-called pro- 
fessor?” he asked. 

“ Me? Why, next to nothing, only that he comes 
from down near New York City at a place called 
Coney Island, where lots of fakirs hold out; and 
plenty of men too, in the summer season, who 
would want to circulate a little money that did 
not bear the Government stamp.” 

“But your father seems to have known him; 
or at any rate believed he was a law-abiding citi- 
zen,” pursued Paul; “otherwise he would hardly 
have given him the privilege of storing his cases 
in his mill over night.” 

“Oh! my father is that easy-going, nearly any- 
body could pull the wool over his eyes. He be- 
lieved the yarn this pretended professor told him. 
I’ve no doubt, and thought it next door to noth- 
ing to let him keep the boxes in the mill for a short 
time. You know, my father is the best-hearted 
man in Stanhope, barring none. But I agree with 


236 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


the rest of you that this time he must have got 
stung. The professor is sure a bad egg. I must 
put my dad wise as soon as I get half a chance.” 

“ Perhaps it’s already too late to save him from 
getting stuck with a lot of the stuff they manu- 
facture?” suggested Tom Betts. 

“Oh I that could hardly be so,” Jack replied, 
cheerfully. “When these bogus money-makers 
want to get rid of some of their stock they al- 
ways have go-betweens do the job for them. It 
would be too easy tracing things if they passed 
the stuff themselves. So I guess my dad hasn’t 
taken in any great amount of the counterfeits.” 

Bobolink was down on his knees. He even 
crawled into one of the overturned boxes, as 
though trying hard to ascertain from sundry 
marks what could have been contained under that 
wooden cover. 

He came out, shaking his head, as though his 
efforts had not been attended by success. 

“ Looks like machinery of some kind, that’s all 
I c’n tell,” he admitted. “ But of course, they’d 
need a press of some sort to work off the paper 
money on. Now, chances are, it’s bein’ put up 
right in that long shed yonder, that we c’n see. 
Question is, how’re we goin’ to get close enough 
to peek through a crack, and find out what’s goin’ 
on in there?” 

Again did most of the boys look uneasily at 


TIME TO GO BACK 


237 


each other. Paul believed that, now the great test 
had arrived, they were beginning to weaken a 
little. No doubt it did not seem so glorious a 
thing when you got close up, this spying on a 
band of lawless men, who would be apt to deal 
harshly with eavesdroppers, if caught in the act. 

Still, he would not give the order to retreat 
unless they asked for it. They had been allowed 
to settle that matter when they voted; it was up 
to Bobolink, Tom, Bluff or Andy to start the 
ball rolling, if they began to reconsider their hasty 
conclusion of a while back. 

Bobolink looked toward the low, long shed, 
now plainly seen, in something of a rocky open- 
ing, with glimpses of water beyond which told 
how close to the shore it had been built. But 
he did not act as though as anxious to rush mat- 
ters as before. 

“Why d’ye believe they ever landed those 
boxes where they did, and toted ’em all the way 
up here, heavy as they were, when there’s the 
water close by?” asked Jack. 

“ I was thinking about that a minute ago,” re- 
plied Paul; “and the only explanation I can find 
is this: Perhaps the water is mighty shallow all 
around up at the north end of the island. I can 
see that the shore is rocky, and if that’s so, then 
no boat with a heavy load could get close enough 


238 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


in to land the stuff. And so they had to get busy, 
and carry the boxes, one at a time.” 

“Sounds reasonable, and we’ll let her go at 
that,” commented Bobolink, who, as a rule, was 
contented to take Paul’s opinion. 

Paul himself stooped down to take a look into 
the cases. He did not make any remark as he 
straightened up again, nor did any of the others 
think to ask his opinion; which possibly may have 
been lucky, for perhaps Paul would not have liked 
to commit himself just then. If he had found 
anything that gave him a new clue, he was evi- 
dently keeping it to himself until he could get 
more proof. 

“ S’pose we ought to make a fresh start,”* sug- 
gested Bobolink, but with a lack of eagerness 
that was plainly noticeable; it was as though the 
discovery of those two mysterious boxes under 
such strange conditions had rather cooled his ar- 
dor. 

“ That’s so,” remarked Tom. 

“We’ve g-g-got so n-n-near now, we ought to 
f-f-finishi” Bluff declared. 

And yet none of them made the slightest move- 
ment looking to an advance, a fact that Paul 
could not help but notice, and which warned him 
they were close to the point of a change of policy. 
A suggestion that they give up the spy business 
at this stage, and retreat in good order to their 


TIME TO GO BACK 


239 

camp, would doubtless have met with favor, and 
been sure of a unanimous vote. 

But still Paul, having his own notions of such 
matters, when dealing with boys, declined to say 
anything. If one of the four who were mainly 
responsible for their being there should take it 
upon himself to offer such a motion, he would 
only too gladly put it to a vote. Until such tim^. 
came he must continue to remain silent. 

“Just as you say, boys; Fm carrying out your 
plans,” he remarked, quietly, wishing to let them 
know that they had it in their own power to alter 
conditions at any time they so desired. 

They all finally moved after the scout master, 
even if some feet did lag a little. Bluff and Phil 
particularly were conscious of a strange sinking 
sensation in the region of their hearts, which they 
mistrusted signified fear; and rather than have 
any of their comrades suspect that they had a cold 
hand pressing there, they shut their teeth hard 
together, and determined that under no circum- 
stances would they show the white feather. 

So Paul led them on. 

Again they tried to conceal themselves as best 
they might in devious ways. Here the wide and 
generous trunk of a friendly tree afforded them 
a certain amount of shelter; a little further on 
a small pile of rocks answered the same benevo- 
lent purpose; but always the main idea was to 


240 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

hide from any curious eyes that might be on the 
lookout in the vicinity of that queer looking shed 
— newly made, if the fresh boards signified any- 
thing. 

“Looky here! there’s a man!” suddenly ex- 
claimed Bobolink. 

The others had discovered the man at about 
the same time. They all lay flat and hardly dared 
breathe, lest in some manner they attract the at- 
tention of the stranger, who seemed to be not 
only a big man, but rather a fierce-looking fellow 
in the bargain. 

He was glancing all around at the heavens, as 
though wondering whether the aeroplane was not 
coming back, whatever its mission in flying away 
south could have been. Standing there, he shaded 
his eyes with his hands and continued to look to- 
ward the south for several minutes. Then he 
made a gesture as of disappointment, and van- 
ished around the corner of the shed. 

“Never looked down this way once!” Bobo- 
link said triumphantly, as though their escape 
had caused his spirits to rise a little. 

“ That leaves the coast clear again, anyhow,” 
said Tom Betts, as if he now had a rather disa- 
greeable duty to perform, which, since it had to 
be done, had better be gotten through with as 
speedily as possible. 

When leaving camp these brave scouts had 


TIME TO GO BACK 


241 


never dreamed but that spying upon the enemy 
would prove the most delightful task imaginable. 
Even later on, when they had voted to keep mov- 
ing forward, with so much assurance, the picture 
had not begun to fade; but now it did not seem 
the same. 

As the shelter grew less and less, however, it 
became evident that presently, if they continued to 
advance in this fashion, they must reach a point 
where, in order to make progress, they must ex- 
pose themselves to hostile eyes, should any be 
on the watch. 

Would even this cause one of the four scouts 
to “ take water,” as Bobolink called it, and make 
the sign that he had had enough? 

Paul knew them all pretty well, and he also 
realized the fact that every fellow possessed a 
nature bordering on the stubborn. It was the 
dread of being thought cowardly that kept them 
from taking the cue from Paul, and ending this 
foolish advance. 

They had gone over fifty feet since the last 
stop, and passed the last large tree which could be 
looked on to give them any shelter. 

It was just at this moment that once again the 
big man was seen coming hastily around the cor- 
ner of the shed. 

At sight of him the boys stood still. There was 
no use trying to hide now. Perhaps some faint 


242 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


hope took possession of them that they might be 
unnoticed if they did not move; just as the still 
hunter, stalking a feeding deer, will watch its 
short tail, and whenever he sees it twitch he stands 
perfectly motionless; for he knows that the animal 
is about to raise his head, and that he will prob- 
ably be taken for a stump if he does not move 
hand or foot. 

But evidently the man had sighted the seven 
khaki-clad scouts. He seemed almost petrified 
with amazement at first, and stood staring at 
them. As if awaking from his trance, he began 
to make frantic motions with his arms, and at 
the same time shouted hoarsely at them: 

“Go back! Get out of that I You’re crazy stay- 
ing there I Run, I tell you, while you have the 
:>hance I Get away ! Get away, you fools ! ” 

The scouts looked at each other in astonish- 
ment. What could it all mean? Were all the 
men on this queer island stark, staring crazy? He 
called them that, but it is always a rule for mad 
people to believe every one else crazy but them- 
selves. 

“Say, what does the guy mean?” cried Bobo- 
link, who seemed to be utterly unable to under- 
stand a thing; “mebbe it’s a small-pox hospital 
we’ve run on, fellows ! ” 

But Paul was beginning to see a light. Possibly 
the excited gestures, as well as the urgent words 


TIME TO GO BACK 


243 

of the big man, may have assisted him to arrive 
at a conclusion. 

He no longer felt so decided about not speak- 
ing the word that would cause his little detach- 
ment to turn and retreat. There must be danger 
hovering over them, danger in some terrible form, 
to make that unknown man so urgent. 

“ Let’s get out of this, boys I ” he called, every 
fellow turn, and streak it as fast as he can. And 
get behind trees as quick as you can, because ” 

They had already started to obey the scout mas- 
ter, and possibly had covered a few jumps when 
it seemed that the very earth shook and quivered 
under them, as a fearful roar almost deafened 
every boy. 

Just as you have seen a pack of cards, made into 
tent shape in a curving row, go falling down when 
the first one is touched, so those seven scouts were 
knocked flat by some concussion of the air. 

They had hardly fallen than one and all scram- 
bled to their feet, and fled madly from the scene, 
as if fearful lest the whole end of the island might 
be blown up behind them, and catch them in a 
trap from which there could be no escape. 


CHAPTER XXVI 


HONORABLE SCARS 

So It turned out after all that the scout master 
did not have to change his mind, and give the 
prder for retreat. When that dreadful panic 
'Overwhelmed the scouts, it was really a case of 
"‘every one for himself.” 

Either by rare good luck, or some sort of in- 
stinct, the seven lads managed to keep pretty 
well together as they ran. Not a single fellow 
dreamed of allowing himself to get separated 
from his comrades. It seemed to be a case of 
“ united we stand, divided we fall,” or “ in union 
there is strength.” 

If in their mad rush some of the boys collided 
with trees, or stumbled over obstacles that they 
failed to discover in time, they were not of a mind 
to let such trifles interfere with their making rec- 
ord time. 

In such (rases it was only necessary to scram- 
ble erect again, and put on a little extra spurt in 
order to overhaul their comrades. 

What had taken them half an hour to cover 


24d 


HONORABLE SCARS 


245 


when they were “scouting” in such approved 
fashion, was passed over in about five minutes. 

It was Paul who came to his senses first. He 
realized that there was no one chasing them and 
that, to tell the truth, not one of the boys could 
have been seriously hurt by what had befallen. 

So he began to laugh, and the sound reaching 
the ears of the others, appeared to act on their 
excited minds like soothing balm. 

Gradually the whole lot slackened their pace 
until they were going at a jog trot; which in turn 
settled down to a walk. 

Finally Bobolink came to a full stop. 

“ Whee ! let’s get a few decent breaths, fel- 
lows ! ” he managed to gasp. 

The others were apparently nothing loth, and 
so they all drew up in a bunch. A sorry lot they 
looked just then, to tell the truth. It seemed as 
though nearly every fellow had some distinguish- 
ing mark. 

Phil’s rather aristocratic face had a long scratch 
that extended down the right side, and gave him 
a queer look; Jack was caressing a lump on his 
forehead, which he may have received from a 
tree, or else when he was knocked down without 
warning by that singular explosion; Andy was 
trying to quench a nose-bleed, and needed his 
face washed the worst way; Bluff’s left eye seemed 
partly closed, as if he had been too close to the 


246 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


business end of an angry bee; while Bobolink 
had two or three small cuts about his face that 
made him look as if he had been trying to tattoo 
himself — with wretched success. 

So they looked at one another, and each thought 
the balance of the crowd had the appearance of 
a set of lunatics on the rampage. 

Hardly had they stared at each other than 
they set to laughing. 

“Oh I my stars! but aren’t you a screamer 
though, Andy, with all that blood smeared over 
your face; and Bluff, why he looks as if he’d 
been in a prize fight! ” was the way Bobolink ex- 
pressed his feelings, bending over as he laughed. 

“Huh! you’re not so very pretty yourself! ’ 
replied Bluff’, with not the slightest sign of an 
impediment in his speech — evidently it had been 
frightened out of his system for the time being. 
“ Anybody’d think you were a South Sea Islander 
on the warpath. And wouldn’t they cross over 
to the other side of the road in a hurry if they 
met you ! Say, if Mazie Kenwood or Laura Car- 
son could only see you now, they’d give you the 
cut straight.” 

“Look at Jack’s bump, would you?” Tom 
Betts exclaimed. 

“ Don’t call attention to me any more than 
you can help,” Jack remarked, making a wry 
face, as he caressed the protuberance on his fore- 


HONORABLE SCARS 


247 


head; “it feels as big as a walnut, let me tell 
you, and hurts like fun. The sooner Tm back in 
camp, so I can slap some witch hazel on, that 
lump, the better it’ll please me, boys.” 

After a little more laughing and grumbling, 
Paul, who had escaped without any visible hurts, 
though he walked a little lame, remarked: 

“Well, do we start right back again, and take 
a look-in on those men? Don’t everybody speak 
at once, now ! ” 

All the same they did, and the burden of the 
united protest was that circumstances alter cases; 
that they had arrived at the conclusion that what 
those men were doing on the island could be no 
affair of honest, law-abiding scouts; and that as 
for them, the camp in the sink offered more at- 
tractions at that particular moment than any- 
thing elese they could think of. 

Of course that settled it. The scouting was 
over for that occasion. They had done them- 
selves credit, as far as it went; but then, who 
would ever dream that they would come within 
an ace of being blown sky-high with the whole 
upper end of the island? 

As if by common consent, they started to move 
forward again, and every fellow seemed to know, 
as if by instinct, which was south, and where- 
abouts the camp was, for they needed no pilot 


now. 


248 THE BAIsTNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


And as they journeyed they talked It all over. 
Every boy seemed to have an opinion of his own 
with regard to what had happened, and they dif- 
fered radically. 

“Tell you what,” said Tom Betts, who had 
also escaped with only a few minor injuries, be- 
cause he was as quick as a cat, and must have 
fallen on a soft piece of ground besides; “tell 
you what, I thought that old hill had turned into 
a volcano, and just bust all to flinders.” 

“Well, now,” Phil admitted, “I somehow had 
an idea that storm had chased up when we didn’t 
chance to be watching, and lightning had struck 
a tree close to the place where we happened to be 
standing looking at that crazy man wave his 
arms.” 

“ Me?” Bobolink remarked; “why, I was dead 
sure what we guessed about a war game bein’ 
played up here between two pretended hostile 
armies was right; and that one of ’em had blown 
up the fort of the other. You see, that aeroplane 
had a sorter military air about it, even if I didn’t 
see it. And I’m not sure yet it isn’t that.” 

“One thing sure,” remarked Paul; “the man 
was trying to warn us to keep back, for he knew 
some sort of mine was going to explode, and 
that we might be killed. As it was, we got off 
pretty lucky, I think. This sprain will heal in 
a day or two; but if a rock weighing a ton or two 


HONORABLE SCARS 


249 


had dropped down on me, I guess the chances 
of my ever seeing Stanhope again would have 
been mighty slim.” 

“But tell me,” Bobolink asked, “what in the 
world would counterfeiters want with exploding 
mines, and doin’ all that sort of thing? Just 
remember that big bang we had the other night, 
that woke everybody up. Shows it’s a habit with 
’em, and that this wasn’t some freak accident- 
Gee ! my head’s buzzing around so I can’t think 
straight. Somebody do my guessin’ for me; 
won’t you, please?” 

“That’s right,” said Tom Betts, suddenly; 
“who are these men, anyway? P’raps we didn’t 
size ’em up straight when we made up our minds 
they were bogus money-makers. Mebbe they hap- 
pen to be a different sort of crowd altogether. 
How about that, Paul ; am I off my trolley when 
I say that? ” 

“ I’ve been beginning to believe something was 
crooked in our guess for a little while, Tom,” re- 
plied the scout master; “but all the same, you’ve 
got me up in the air when you ask who and what 
they are. I’m rattled more than I’ve been in 
many a day, to be honest with you all.” 

Bobolink took out something from his pocket. 
He stared hard at the two shining quarters, and 
jingled them in his hand. 

“Look good to me,” he was heard to say; “I’d 


250 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT ' 

pass ’em any time for genuine. But what silly 
chump’d be throwing good money around like 
that, tell me?” 

“ Or bad money either, Bobolink,” remarked 
Paul; “ so you see, it was an accident in any case. 
You’ve lost money many a time out of your 
pocket; well, this man was in the same boat. 
Chances are, that’s straight goods.” 

Bobolink grinned. 

“ If that’s so,” he remarked calmly, “ I’m in 
a half dollar, and that’s some satisfaction. But 
say, what a time we’ll have tellin’ the boys. Wow! 
I can see the eyes of Little Billie, and Curly, and 
Nuthin just stickin’ out of their heads when they 
hear all we’ve run up against. ” 

“And we’d better move along a little faster 
while about it,” observed Paul. 

“ Why? Hope you don’t think any of those men 
arc chasin’ after us; or that we’ll run up against 
that wild man, or the big yellow dog again?” 
Bobolink inquired, glancing fearfully about him. 

“No, I was considering the feelings of the 
boys,” replied the scout master. 

“That’s a fact,” Jack went on, “they’ll be 
worried about us, after hearing that terrible re- 
port, and think something has happened to our 
crowd. But we’re not a great way from camp 
now, Paul.” 

“No, and if the distance was greater, I’d stop 


HONORABLE SCARS 


251 


long enough to send up a smoke signal that would 
tell Jud we were all right. But that’d take time, 
and perhaps we’d better hurry along,” and the 
scout master set a new pace, even though limping 
slightly. 

“ Got hurt some yourself ; did you, Paul ? ” Jack 
asked, solicitously. 

“ Oh I only a little sprain, but it happens to be 
on a muscle that I have to use when I walk, and 
you know a fellow favors such a pain. But I 
can see where the sink lies now; we’ll be there 
in ten minutes, perhaps half that.” 

They continued to push on. For the time being 
most of them forgot about their personal troubles, 
in their anxiety to join their comrades. And Bob- 
olink, as he walked beside Jack, spoke what was 
on his mind : 

“It was a grand old scare, all right, and one 
we won’t ever forget, believe me; but there’s one 
thing that tickles me half to death. Jack. We 
know now where the queer old boxes went to, even 
if we are up in the air about what was in them. 
And the chances are we may find that out before 
we’re done with this business; because those men 
ought to come down and ask if anybody got hurt 
by their silly Fourth of July fireworks display. 
There’s the camp, boys. Whoopee I ” 


CHAPTER XXVII 


ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL 

Loud cheers greeted the appearance of the 
seven scouts, as they hurried forward into the 
camp. And when those who had remained with 
the tents saw the various scratches, contusions 
and bumps that adorned most of the returned 
boys’ faces, they were burning with eagerness to 
hear the details of the adventure. 

Such a clatter of tongues as ensued, as every 
fellow tried to tell his version of the happening. 
If half that was said were written down, it would 
require many more chapters to give the details. 

Gradually, however, each stay-at-home scout 
began to get a pretty clear idea of the series of 
adventures that had befallen their mates in trying 
to explore the mysteries of the island. They un- 
derstood all about the wild man, and what the 
consensus among the seven explorers seemed to 
be concerning the strangers who occupied the 
island, and were conducting such an amazing serieis 
of experiments, even making use of an aeroplaivC 
to accomplish their ends. 

252 


ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL 253 


The guesses that followed were legion, yet 
Paul, who listened patiently to the most astound- 
ing theories, shook his head in the end. 

“ I don’t believe any of us have hit on the right 
thing yet, fellows,” he said. “ But there’s meat 
in a number of the guesses you’ve made, and per- 
haps we’ll get the story after a while. But how 
about grub; we’re as hungry as bears?” 

“Never expected to join you at lunch, for a 
fact,” grinned Bobolink; “but then, we made bet- 
ter time than we ever thought we could on the 
return journey. Talk to me about a prize spurrin’ 
a fellow on to do his level best — the whip that 
does it is to put a first-class scare in him. Then 
you’re goin’ to see some runnin’ that takes the 
cake. Wheel didn’t we sprint, though? Bet 
you I jumped clear over a log that stood six feet 
high from the ground — more or less.” 

It happened that the stay-at-home scouts had 
just prepared their noon meal at the time the 
explosion occurred that made the whole island 
tremble. Tha; had startled them so much that 
they had not had the heart to think of sitting 
down because of anxiety about the foie of their 
chums. 

And so the dinner had remained untouched Up 
to the time they heard the “ cooee ” of the return- 
ing warriors; and then caught the bark of the foK* 


254 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


that told them that Paul and his posse had re- 
turned. 

There was enough for all, because the cooks 
were very liberal in making up their messes. And 
over the dinner more suggestions were made as 
to what their future course ought to be. 

By now even the fire-eating Bobolink was ready 
to cry quits, and back down; nor did he seem at 
all ashamed to admit the fact that he was afraid. 

“ If those sillies mean to blow up the whole 
island, some way or other, why, what’s the use 
of us stayin’ here, an’ goin’ up with it. I’d like 
to know?” he said. “Tell you what, I’ve got 
another guess cornin’, and it’s this : P’raps they’re 
meanin’ to get rid of this island and lake, and 
have started to do the job. Mebbe some big 
railroad wants a short line across country, and 
this thing is right in their way. I’ve heard of 
’em doin’ bigger things than just blowing up a 
little island ; haven’t you, Paul ? ” 

He always appealed to the scout master when 
one of his brilliant thoughts came along. Paul 
nodded his head. 

“ That sounds more reasonable than a whole lot 
of things I’ve been listening to, Bobolink, for a 
fact,” Paul admitted. “ Still, we don’t know, and 
there’s no way to find out the true story, right 
now. Listen, fellows I ” 

“ Thunder, away off, Paul ; guess we’ve all got 


ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL 255 


explosions on the brain, because it gave me a 
start, too,** said Jack, laughing. 

“And if a storm*s coming along,** observed 
Jud Elderkin, who seemed vastly pleased when 
he heard that his signalling had been so easily 
understood, “ why, I reckon we ought not to think 
of pulling down our good tents, and getting out 
of here, till she*s over.*’ 

It was plain from this that the scouts had de- 
termined to abandon their dangerous island, and 
spend the balance of the outing by making a camp 
on the mainland, where at least there was a rea- 
sonable expectation of not being blown sky-high 
by some explosion. 

“And since we’re done eating perhaps we’d 
better take another look at the tent pins, to make 
sure they’ll hold when the wind strikes us. Some 
of these summer storms have a lively advance 
breeze, you know, boys,” Paul suggested. 

“ Little Billie and I’ll go over to the boats, and 
see that the curtains are buttoned down snug. 
Some of us can stay inside while its rainin’ and 
that’ll give more room in the tents,” Bobolink 
remarked, jumping to his feet, with a return of 
his customary lively way. 

“ And In this sink we’ll be protected from any 
wind coming from the south, don’t you think, 
Paul?” Jack ventured. 

“ Couldn’t be better,” was the reply. “ Those 


256 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

trees and bushes, as well as the rise in the ground, 
will help a lot. But get busy, fellows, with those 
tent pins. I’ll take the axe, and go the rounds 
myself, to make doubly sure. It’s not the nicest 
thing in the world to have your canvas blow 
away — eh, Nuthin?” 

“You’re right, it isn’t,” replied the little scout, 
“ ’specially when it lifts you right up with it into 
a tree, and has you tied up there in the snarls of 
a clothes line. I know all about that, and none 
of the rest of you ever tried it. Excuse me from 
another balloon ride like that.” 

In a short time everything was done that could 
be thought of to render things storm-proof. Then 
the boys went over to the edge of the water to 
watch the advance of the black clouds, which 
those at the boats in the little cove declared was 
a sight worth seeing. 

And it certainly was, all the scouts admitted. 
Some of them were filled with a certain awe, as 
they saw how inky the clouds looked. But what 
boy, or man either, for that matter, is there who 
has not felt this sensation when watching scur- 
rying clouds that tell of an approaching storm? 

By degrees the boys began to drift back to the 
camp. Every sort of excuse was given for leav- 
ing the beach. One fellow suddenly remembered 
that he had left his coat hanging on a bush, an- 
other had forgotten to fasten his knapsack, while 


ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL 257 


a third wished to tie his blanket in a roll, in case 
the water did find a way to get into the sink, 

Paul, Jack, Bobolink and Jud remained until 
they saw the rough water away down near the 
southern shore of the lake, and understood that 
the first squall must be swooping upon them. Then 
they too gave up the vigil, for the chances were 
the rain would come with the first breeze. 

With a howl and a roar the storm broke upon 
them. Cowering in the tents, about four in each, 
as the others had taken to the boats, they waited 
with more or less suspense what might happen. 

The wind made the canvas shake at a lively 
clip, and the fastenings on the southern side were 
sorely tried; but they had been well taken care 
of and Paul called out that he believed they were 
going to hold. 

For half an hour the rain beat down in tor- 
rents. None of them remembered ever hearing 
such a deluge descend, but perhaps their imagin- 
ations were excited on account of the peculiar con- 
ditions that surrounded them. All the same it 
rained, and then rained some more, until a very 
large quantity of water must have fallen, all of 
them decided. 

With Paul and Jack in the tent that was nearest 
to the lake were Bobolink, Tom Betts and Nu- 
thin. 

“ Seems to me it’s gettin’ kind of damp in here,” 


258 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

remarked Bobolink, when the clamor outside had 
died down somewhat, and they could hear each 
other talk. 

“That’s a fact,” declared Paul; “and after all 
it’s just as well that we made sure our blankets 
and other things were tied up and hung away 
from the ground. But seems to me I hear one of 
the fellows in the boat shouting to us.” 

When he opened the flap he found that the 
rain had almost stopped, as well as the wind to 
a great extent. Perhaps the storm was over. 

“Hello I” Paul called out. 

“Hey! that you, Paul?” came in a voice he 
recognized as belonging to Jud, who had been 
one of those in charge of the nearby boats. 

“Yes, what’s wrong?” asked the scout mas- 
ter. 

“ Can’t you come over here? Going to be the 
dickens to pay, I reckon. The bally old lake’s 
rising like fun. Looks like the outlet must have 
got stopped up somehow. You’re sure going to 
have to move your tents mighty quick. Coming, 
Paul?” 

“ All right,” answered the other, as he crawled 
out, and started under the dripping trees for the 
spot where the two motorboats lay in the cove, 
sheltered from the waves that had been dashing 
against the shore elsewhere. 

When he reached the spot he found that all 


ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL 259 


of the boys who had been sheltered in the boats 
were lined up on the shore, where they could see 
down the lake. Jud himself seemed to be watch- 
ing the water steal up a stick he had thrust into 
the sand. 

“ Gee ! she’s mounting like fun ! ” he exclaimed. 
“ Water must be pouring into the old lake from 
every side, and little gettin’ out. Say, if this 
keeps on, the whole island, except that hill up 
yonder, will be under water before night. It sets 
rather low, you understand, Paul.” 

The scout master was naturally thrilled by these 
words. He knew that the leader of the Gray 
Fox Patrol was no alarmist, and that he seldom 
lost his head in times of excitement. 

And so it was with considerable apprehension 
that Paul stooped down so he might see just ho\V 
fast the lake was rising. And when he noticed 
that it actually crept up the stick before his very 
eyes, he knew that what Jud had said about the 
whole island being covered might not be such a 
silly assertion after all. 

It began to look as though the adventures of 
the scouts had not yet reached an end, and that 
they were in for another thrilling experience. 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


PREPARED FOR THE WORST 

“She's just walking up hand over fist; eh, 
Paul? ” asked Jud. 

“No question about it, Jud,” came the reply 
as the scout master cast an apprehensive look 
across the half-mile of water that separated them 
from the outlet of the lake. “I’d give something 
to know what’s happened down there, to dam this 
water up, and just how far it’s going to rise on 
us.” 

“Tell you what,” said Bobolink, who had fol- 
lowed Paul when he left the tent, as had also the 
rest of the occupants, “ I wouldn’t be a bit sur- 
prised if that awful explosion shook the shoulder 
of earth and rock down, that we saw hanging 
above the mouth of the Radway River where she 
leaves the lake.” 

“You’ve hit it, I do believe!” cried Paul, ex- 
ultantly; “and that’s just what did happen, 
chances are, fellows.” 

“ But if the outlet is filled up,” said Jud, “ and 
this water keeps pouring in on four sides- it’s 


PREPARED FOR THE WORST 


261 


dead sure the blooming lake will fill up in short 
order. What had we better do, Paul?” 

“ That’s just what I’m trying to figure on, Jud,” 
answered the other; “it’s one of two things — 
eithe/ hike out for the hill, where we’ll be 
safe until the water goes down; or else get our 
things aboard the boats, and stay here.” 

“ That last strikes me as the best of all I ” de- 
clared Jack. 

“Besides,” broke in Nuthin, “we don’t want 
to lose those boats, you know. They were loaned 
to us and if we let ’em go to smash, wouldn’t it 
take us a long time to pay the bill, though? Be- 
sides, we’ll need ’em to get away from here.” 

“That isn’t the worst of it,” remarked Paul, 
who was very serious. 

“Why, what is there besides?” demanded Bob- 
olink. 

“ Suppose the water does get up so as to cover 
the island, all but the hill, “ the scout master went 
on deliberately, as though making sure of his 
ground as he talked; “and then, all of a sudden 
the weight of it broke through the dam ; don’t you 
see the suction, as the water rushed out, would 
be something terrific. No rope ever made, I 
reckon, could hold these boats back. They’d sure 
be drawn through the gap, and carried on the 
Sood, any old way, even upside-down, maybe.” 

“Whew I ” whistled Bobolink; and as for some 


262 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


of the other fellows, they began to lose their usual 
color as they realized what Paul was saying. 

“Now, that’s just an idea that came into my 
mind,” Paul went on, seeing that he had alarmed 
some of the scouts. “ It may never happen, you 
understand. But you know the motto we believe 
in is ‘be prepared I* That means never to take 
things for granted. Keep your eyes and ears al- 
ways on guard, and see lots of things, even be- 
fore they swoop down on you. So, it’s up to us, 
fellows, to get our tents and other fixings loaded 
up as soon as we can. After that we’ll go aboard 
ourselves, and try to prepare against a sudden 
break In the dam.” 

“And lookin’ at that water creeping up,” re- 
marked Jud, “ the sooner we get busy, the better.” 

Accordingly, they all hastened back to the camp. 
It was found that already the water seemed to 
be creeping into the sink. Those In the other 
two tents were talking it over, and wondering what 
was about to happen. 

When they heard the latest news, their faces 
indicated both astonishment and not a little alarm. 
But under the direction of the scout master, they 
started to convey all their belongings to the boats. 

First the blankets and clothes bags were taken 
over; then the food and cooking utensils; and 
finally the tents came down in a hurry, for the 
boys were working in water almost up to their 


PREPARED FOR THE WORST 263 

knees when this last part of the job was con* 
eluded. 

Once out of the sink, they found plenty of high 
ground to walk on, while carrying the wet tents 
to the landing where the boats were lying. 

After they were all aboard, the scouts packed 
the stuff as best they could, so that it would take 
up as little space as possible. Meanwhile Paul 
and Jack, with both the other patrol leaders, were 
trying to figure out just what would be the best 
course for them to pursue. 

** Makes me think cf old Noah, when he went 
aboard the ark, and the animals they followed two 
by two,” said Bobolink, with a chuckle, 

“ Huh, call yourself a kangaroo, or a monkey, 
if you like,” spoke up Old Dan Tucker, “but 
as for me Fd rather play the part of Ham., or 
one of the other sons.” 

“Sure thing!” assented Bobolink, cheerfully; 
“never saw the time yet when you raised any 
kick about takin’ the part of Ham. Sounds good, 
don’t It, Dan? ” 

It was pretty hard to keep the spirits of Bobo- 
link from sizzling and gushing forth like a foun- 
tain when the water is turned on. He could joke, 
even while the several leaders of the expedition 
were consulting gravely about their chances of 
holding the boats against the frightful suction of 
the current, when the obstructions In the outlet of 


264 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


the lake gave way, which they hoped would not 
be suddenly, but by degrees. 

It was certainly a condition that confronted 

them, and not a theory. Paul was really more 
worried than he showed; for he kept his feelings 
under control, knowing that if some of the others 
realized how much he was concerned, the fact 
might create a panic. 

“If I really thought the worst would come,” 
Paul said, in a low tone, to Jack, after it had been 
concluded that they would stay by the boats, and 
do the best they could, “ why I’d be tempted to 
give the order to just cut for the hill, and leave 
everything but some food behind. Once up there, 
we would be safe, and that’s what we can’t say 
is the case now.” 

“ But even if the water goes out with a rush, 
it can’t tear a tree like this one up by the roots; 
can it?” asked Jack, pointing to where the cables 
of the boats had been secured as strongly as pos- 
sible. 

“That’s so,” replied the scout master; “but 

then, think of the ropes, and what a terrible strain 
would come on them. I’m afraid both would snap 
like pipe-stems. To hold tight, we’d need a big 
chain; or a hawser like that one the switching 
engine on the railroad uses to drag cars on a 
parallel track. But then, the water may be nearly 


PREPARED FOR THE WORST 265 


as high, right now, as it will get. We’ll hope so, 
anyhow.” 

That was Paul’s way of trying to look on the 
bright side, although he never failed to prepare 
for the worst, even while expecting the best. 

“If we could only think up some way to help 
ease the strain, it would be a good thing,” ob- 
served Jack, thoughtfully. 

“ I wish you could. It would ease my mind 
more than I care to tell you,” was Paul’s answer. 

“One thing, the storm is over,” called out Jud, 
just then; “see, there’s a break in the clouds, and 
I reckon the sun will be peepin’ out soon.” 

“ But the water will keep on rushing down the 
sides of the hills away off yonder,” Paul remarked, 
“ and filling up this cup until it runs over. They 
say that the Radway River drains three times the 
amount of country that our own Bushkill does. 
And by the way the water comes in here, I believe 
It. Look out there on the lake, will you ; it shows 
that it’s getting wider right now.” 

“Why, in another half hour, if it keeps on the 
same way, it’s going to lap over pretty much all 
the lower part of the island,” Jack declared. 

Everything else was neglected now, and the 
scouts gathered along the side of each boat, watch- 
ing the lake. It was as if they half expected to 
see the water suddenly take to rushing toward the 
spot where they knew the peculiar outlet lay, not 


266 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


more than twenty feet across, and with abrupt 
sides, one of which had been partly overhanging 
the water at the time they entered. 

It was, of course, this section which must have 
been dislodged by the blast which shook the sur- 
rounding territory, filling the bed of the stream, 
and causing the rapidly accumulating waters of 
the lake to back up, since they could find no place 
to discharge, as usual. 

It was while they were moodily watching the 
waste of waters that one of the scouts, who had 
wandered across to the other side of the Comfort, 
suddenly sounded a fresh alarm, that sent an- 
other thrill to the hearts of the already excited 
boys. 

“Hey I here’s a lot of men cornin’ down on us, 
fellows ! They’re meanin’ to capture our boats, 
just like pirates. Boarders ahoy! Get busy 
everybody. Clubs are trumps ! ” 

As they rushed to the other side, some having 
to clamber over the heaps of duffle that took up 
so much room aboard, the scouts saw that it was 
no false alarm. A number of men were hurrying 
toward them, splashing through water that was 
in places almost knee deep, even when they took 
the upper levels. Should they make a blunder, 
and stray off the ridges, it was likely they would 
speedily have to swim for it. 

Paul was considerably aroused at first. They 


PREPARED FOR THE WORST 267 


did not know very much about these mysterious 
people of the island; and after their recent rough 
experience, most of the boys were decidedly averse 
to knowing anything more of them. And yet, 
here they were hurrying toward the two motor- 
boats, as though they might indeed have some des- 
perate idea in view. 

Perhaps they meant to capture the boats, so 
as to insure their escape from the rising waters. 
And then again, it seemed at feast possible that 
they might want to keep the scouts from telling 
what strange things they had seen. 

So the first thing Paul did when he had that 
glimpse of the oncoming men, was to hasten to 
possess himself of his double-barreled shotgun. 
Not that he expected that there would be any 
necessity for firing it, but it was apt to inspire a 
certain amount of respect. 

And the balance of the scouts had made haste 
to arm themselves with whatever they could find 
that would help hold the enemy at bay. Some 
had brought their clubs aboard, others seized 
upon the push poles, while one grabbed up the 
camp axe, and another seized upon the hatchet. 

When eighteen husky and determined lads line 
the sides of two boats, prepared to give a good 
account of themselves, it must needs be brave men 
who would dare try to clamber aboard. 


268 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


And it was about this time, when things were 
looking rather squally around the floating homes 
of the scouts, that Paul noticed something sin* 
gular. 


CHAPTER XXIX 


LIFTING THE LID 

Three men could be seen splashing desperately 
through the water; and they seemed to be carrying 
a fourth, who was lying on a rude sort of litter, 
as though he might either be sick, or badly hurt. 

And so it flashed through Paul’s mind that per- 
haps after all their mission was not one of con- 
quest, or even hostility, but that they were seeking 
help. 

“ Hold up, fellows,” he hastened to say; “ we’ll 
have to let them come aboard now, because they 
never could get back to the hill again, with the 
water rising so fast. Besides, I thmk they’ve got 
a wounded man along, and need help. Don’t for- 
get we’re scouts, and always ready to hold out 
a helping hand.” 

That’s the ticket!” declared the impulsive 
Bobolink, forgetting his warlike disposition when 
he saw the man on the litter. 

So Paul beckoned to the men to approach. He 
had already made the discovery that one of those 
who bore the litter was the big man who had 
269 


270 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


waved them away with such violent gestures, just 
before the terrible explosion, when they happened 
to get too near the mine that was being fired for 
some strange purpose. 

Two minutes later, and still splashing through 
water that came almost up to their hips, those 
who bore the injured man arrived close to the 
boats. 

“ Why, it’s Professor Hackett who’s being car- 
ried!” exclaimed Jack. 

The small man on the litter, who looked very 
white, lifted his head with an effort, and tried to 
wave his hand. 

“Yes, that’s who it is; and you’re Jack Storm- 
ways; aren’t you? Oh! I hope that chum of yours 
can do something to stop this bleeding; I made 
them carry me down here as a last chance. My 
man who was sent for a doctor in our aeroplane, 
has not come back, and we’re afraid he had an 
accident. Can some of you boys help lift me 
aboard? I’m very weak from loss of blood, and 
nearly gone.” 

His voice was as faint ^s a whisper; and indeed, 
it was a wonder that he managed to speak at all. 

The scouts had quite forgotten everything but 
that there was some one In trouble. Tender hands 
immediately were forthcoming to assist In raising 
Utter and man over the side of the boat. Then the 
three attendants climbed aboard, and strange to 


LIFTING THE LID 


271 


say the scouts seemed to have forgotten all their 
fear of the men they had believed to be lawbreak- 
ers. For now they saw that they were an in- 
telligent lot of men, who bore little resemblance 
to such criminals as they had seemed to be. 

Paul had long been interested in surgery. His 
father was the leading doctor of Stanhope, and 
had always encouraged this fancy in the boy. It 
seemed that the professor chanced to remember 
that he had been told about the ability of Jack 
Stormways’ chum; and when matters began to 
look desperate, since none of his assistants could 
seem to stop the flow of blood that followed his 
accident, as a last resort he had forced them to 
put him on a litter, and make for the spot where 
they knew the scouts had their camp, the man in 
the aeroplane having signaled the fact back to 
them, just as Paul suspected. 

Of course they had not dreamed of such a thing 
as the lake rising, until they had gone too far to 
retreat; and then they took desperate chances of 
finding the boys still there, where they had boats 
with which they could go to the mainland. 

Paul busied himself immediately. It was a 
pretty bad wound that the little man had received, 
and his left arm would be practically useless the 
balance of time; but he cared not for this, if only 
his life might be spared. 


272 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


Jack and Jud assisted whenever their services 
were needed and in the end Paul had not only 
stopped the flow of blood, but had the injured 
arm neatly bandaged — as well, the professor 
weakly declared, as any surgeon could have done. 

“And now,” said Paul, turning on the big man, 
who had hovered around anxiously, watching what 
was being done, as though he thought a great deal 
of the professor; “ in return for what we’ve done, 
won’t you please tell us who and what you are, 
and why you’re doing all these queer stunts away 
up here on this lonely island, where nobody can 
see you ? We’re all mixed up, and don’t know what 
to think. At first we believed you must be a lot 
of counterfeiters hiding from the Government 
agents; but what with these explosions, and such 
things as aeroplanes. I’m getting it in my head 
that it means you’re trying out some big sensa- 
tions that are going to be sprung on the Coney 
Island public next season.” 

“And that’s where you made a pretty clever 
guess, my boy,” said the big man, as he settled 
down to take it a bit more easily after his recent 
hard work ; “ Professor Hackett has invented most 
of the biggest sensations seen at seaside resorts 
these last ten years. He expects to excel his 
record next season, and then retire; and I tell 
you, now, I began to think he’d retire another 


LIFTING THE LID 273 

way, if he lost much more blood from that wound, 
which he got by accident this morning.” 

The scouts looked at each other, and a broad 
smile appeared on many a face that only a short 
time before had been pale with apprehension. 

When a thing that has seemed a dark mystery 
is finally explained, it often looks so easy and 
simple that all of us wonder how we ever could 
have bothered our heads over such a puzzle. And 
so it was in this case. Why did It come that no 
one had guessed the true explanation before, when 
It was so easy? 

They began to tell the big man all about their 
experiences, and how so many things seemed to 
make It appear that the strangers were hiding 
from officers. 

“ How about that fellow who was hanging 
around my father’s mill that night you had your 
two big boxes stored there?” Jack asked. 

“ He represented a rival Inventor, who has 
always been jealous of Professor Hackett, and Is 
forever trying to find out what he has on the 
stocks,” replied the big man, whose name they 
learned was Mr. Jameson, an able assistant to 
the Inventor of aerial bombs, brilliant exploding 
mines, and a dozen other wonders that thrill au- 
diences at the seashore each season. 

“ But wouldn’t he be likely to follow the wagon 


1274 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 

vyhen it took the boxes away in the morning?” 
the boy continued to ask. 

“ Oh ! we put him on a false scent, by shipping 
two other boxes away on a train,” was the reply. 
“He must have gone two hundred miles before 
he discovered his mistake; and I doubt very much 
if he knows yet, but is watching those cases to 
see what we do with them, away out in western 
New York State.” 

“Er, how about these?” asked Bobolink, jing- 
ling the two shining quarters in his hand. “I 
picked ’em up close to that field smithy you have 
on the island. We thought they were the best 
counterfeits we ever saw. I guess they are.” 

“ I lost a bunch of small change through a hole 
in my pocket,” laughed the man, “ and so I judge 
those are a part of it. But keep them as souvenirs 
of your wonderful adventures on Cedar Island. 
Every time you look at them you’ll remember that 
narrow escape you and your friends had when 
you came near stepping on a mine, the fuse of 
which had been lighted; for Professor Hackett, 
even while he was wounded, would not hear of us 
stopping our work.” 

“ Thanks,” replied the gratified Bobolink, 
again pocketing the quarters that had been the 
cause of so much speculation among the seven 
scouts ; “ I’ll be glad to accept your kind offer. 
But there’s another thing we’d like to know.” 


LIFTING THE LID 


275 


** Speak up, then, and I’ll be pleased to accom- 
modate you, if the knowledge is in my power to 
bestow. This flood bids fair to bring our experi- 
ments to an end for the time being, even if the 
professor’s weakness hadn’t made it necessary 
that we get to some place where he can receive 
the right kind of care, to build up his strength. 
What’s bothering you now, my boy?” 

“How about the wild man?” asked Bobolink. 

“ Oh ! he was here when we came, and we made 
friends with him,” the other replied, promptly. 
“You see, some of us have been up here for a 
month. We had some new stuff shipped in those 
big cases; but it’ll all be rusted now by this water. 
The poor fellow is harmless, for all he looks so 
fierce. Why, at the smell of coffee the tears 
trickled down his dirty cheeks like rain; it seemed 
to be just one last link that bound his flitting 
memory to something in the far-away past. 
We gave him an old saucepan to cook it in, and 
showed him how. Ever since he’s visited us 
often, and we supplied him with food, because it 
seemed as though he was the one who had first 
right to this island.” 

“ I hope the poor old chap has the good sense 
to climb that hill, and get away from the rising 
water,” remarked Jack, with some feeling. “ Have 
you any idea who he can be, or where he came 
from?” 


27 ^ THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


**We made up our minds that he had been 
out of his head a long time, and perhaps had 
escaped from some Institution. He mentioned 
the name of John Pennington once, and we think 
It must have been his. The professor intended 
to make Inquiries, later on, and If possible have 
him returned to his home, wherever It might be.” 

“ Did he have a big yellow dog tied up at his 
shack?” asked Nuthin, eagerly, as though he 
wished to settle that point, because the animal in 
question had once belonged to the Cypher family. 

“Yes,” answered Mr. Jameson, “but It got 
away from him one night, by breaking the rope, 
and he’s been making a great fuss about It ever 
since. But from the ugly looks of the beast. I’d 
sooner put a bullet In him than try to make 
friends.” 

“Well, that about finishes the list of questions 
we’ve been nearly dying to ask somebody,” re- 
marked Bobolink, “and seems like everything’s- 
been explained. What we want to know now, and 
there Isn’t a livin’ soul c’n tell the answer to that, 

I reckon. Is, how high Is this old lake goln’ to 
get before she commences to fall again? And how 
in Sam Hill are we expectin’ to ride those motor- 
boats over that pile of rocks and mud, that lies 
In the outlet? Anybody know the answer? I’d 
like to hear it.” 

But they shook their heads. Nobody could 


LIFTING THE LID 


277 


say, although all sorts of guesses ran the rounds, 
for the scouts were good hands at that sort of 
thing. 

The water was still rising, and apparently just 
as fast as ever. Already it had encroached upon 
the main part of the island; and Mr. Jameson 
declared that he was sure it must be all around 
the shed where they kept their machinery, that 
had been brought secretly to this isolated spot, 
where they hoped to complete the greatest mar- 
vel in the way of sensations ever known to curious 
crowds at watering places. 

“It’ll be badly hurt, unless the water goes 
down soon,” remarked the big man; “but that 
doesn’t seem to be the worst thing that can hap- 
pen, if what your Doctor Paul here, says, turns 
out to be true, and the water goes out of the lake 
in a raging torrent that may drag boats and all 
with it.” 


CHAPTER XXX 


GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND 

They passed a most anxious hour, after the 
coming of the professor and his assistants. The 
lake kept on rising until pretty much all of the 
island except the hill was under water. Of course 
the trees stood out, but most of their roots were 
under ten feet or more of water. 

It would not last much longer, that they knew, 
for the supply must be falling short, and besides 
there was always a chance that the fearful force 
exerted by such a mass of pent-up water would < 
break away the obstruction that clogged the out- 
let. j 

Paul had done everything he could think of to 
add to their security in case the worst came. 
Some of the scouts were even perched in the , 
neighboring trees. These were the more timid, | 

who Paul knew were shivering from anxiety, and | 
watching the spot where the lake water ordinarily | 
escaped, as though dreading lest at any second I 

they should see a sudden heave that would mean ] 
the beginning of the end. \ 

278 j 


GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND 279 

“Good news, Paul!” sang out Jud Elderkin, 
to whom had been delegated the duty of keeping 
watch on the rise of the flood. “ She’s stationary 
at last. Never rose a bit the last ten minutes. 
And believe me, I honestly think she’s begun to 
go down just a little.” 

The other boys let out a cheer at this news. 
That was what they were all hoping for — that the 
water would go down gradually, so as not to en- 
danger the motorboats. 

Just how the craft were to get out of the lake, 
if the exit remained closed, no one could say; but 
then they might look to Paul to open a way some- 
how. He could make use of some dynamite to 
blow up the obstructions, so Mr. Jameson had 
suggested, and it sounded all right. 

Five minutes later Jud was quite positive that 
the tide was on the ebb. 

“Two inches lower than she was at the high- 
est point, Paul I ” he called out, jubilantly. 

“ Hurrah I that sounds good to me I ” exclaimed 
Bobolink, swinging his campaign hat vigorously 
about his head, as he sat in the bow of the Com- 
fort, it being a part of his task to watch the cable, 
and if the worst came to ease up on it so that 
there would be less likelihood of a sudden snap. 

“ But we’re not out of danger yet, remember,” 
cautioned the scout master. 


28 o the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


Presently the water was lowering at a still 
faster rate. 

“Looks like the opening might be getting 
larger,” said Jack, when this fact was made clear 
beyond any doubt. 

“Watch over there,” said Paul, “and see if 
there’s any sudden rush, though already the wa- 
ter is escaping so fast that I begin to believe we 
might hold on here, even if the whole pile of 
earth and rocks were washed away, leaving the 
channel clear.” 

Five, ten, fifteen minutes crept along, and all 
the while the water kept going steadily down until 
much of the island could be seen again under the 
trees. 

“Oh I look, there she goes!” cried Bobolink, 
without warning, and thereby causing some of the 
fellows who had descended from the trees to wish 
they were aloft again. 

Over in the vicinity of the outlet they could see 
something of a commotion. The water seemed 
to be running down hill, as it struggled to pour 
out through the now cleared passage. 

Immediately the boats felt the suction, which 
must have been very strong indeed. They strained 
at their ropes, and those who had the cables in 
charge obeyed the instructions given to them, al- 
lowing a certain length of line 'to slip, thus easing 
the fearful drag. 


GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND 281 


“Whoop! they’re going to hold!” exclaimed 
Bobolink, in great glee. 

Paul believed so himself, and a smile came to 
his face that up to now had looked careworn and 
anxious; for a dreadful catastrophe had been hov- 
ering over them, he felt certain. 

And the ropes did make good, holding in spite 
of that fierce drag. The water soon got down 
to about its normal level, when the pull upon the 
hawsers ceased, and everything seemed to settle 
back into the old rut. 

But the boys had had quite enough of Cedar 
Island. It was water-soaked now, and offered 
little attraction to them for camping. Paul sug- 
gested that they leave the cove and head for a 
certain section of the main shore which, on ac- 
count of being much higher than the island, had 
not been overflowed. 

There was not a single voice raised in opposi- 
tion, and so they started the motors and with a 
series of derisive sounds that seemed almost like 
chuckles the boats said goodbye to Cedar Island. 

Landing they found a splendid spot for the 
erection of the tents, and before the coming of 
night the scouts were as snugly fixed as though 
nothing had happened to disturb them. 

The injured professor declared that he meant 
to stick by Paul until his messenger arrived with 


282 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


a carriage and a doctor by way of the road, which 
ran only a half mile away from the lake. 

He expressed himself satisfied with the work 
Paul had done on his arm, and believed it to be 
the right thing. 

They hoped to spend a quiet night. There 
would be no bomb explosions in the heavens to 
disturb them, at least. Mr. Jameson had already 
explained to the boys that. If they had happened 
to be awake at the time of that first tremendous 
shock, they must have seen by the glare in the 
heavens that It was a new kind of aerial bomb 
that had been fired; and possibly under such con- 
ditions some one of the scouts would have guessed 
the truth. But when they crept out of the tents 
there was nothing to be seen aloft. 

Luckily, these wide-awake boys could accom- 
modate themselves to their surroundings. Their 
former experiences had made most of them quick- 
witted, resolute and cheerful under difficulties that 
might have daunted most lads. 

Although they had received a tremendous 
shock because of the numerous remarkable occur- 
rences that had taken place since their landing on 
Cedar Island, now that their troubles seemed to 
have departed, most of the scouts were just as full 
of life and good-natured “ chaff ” as ever. 

Bluff seemed to never tire of entertaining those 
who had not been fortunate enough to be among 


GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND 283 

the valiant band of explorers with wonderful ac- 
counts of all they had seen. He had them hold- 
ing their very breath with awe, as he described, in 
his own way, how they first of all crept up to the 
shack in the thicket and looked in upon the wild 
man asleep. 

But when Bluff told of how he and his com- 
rades had been warned off in such a dramatic 
manner by the unknown man, and immediately 
afterwards found themselves knocked down by 
that tremendous concussion,, as the explosion took 
place, he had them hanging on his every sentence. 

But words failed Bluff when he tried to picture 
the wild scene that had followed. That furious 
scamper through the wooded part of the island 
must remain pretty much in the nature of a night- 
mare with the boys. 

Phil and Bobolink and Andy all eagerly chimed 
in, trying to do the subject justice, but after all it 
seemed beyond their powers. They could only 
end by holding up both hands, rolling their eyes, 
shrugging their shoulders, and then mutely point- 
ing to the various cuts, scratches and contusions 
that decorated their faces. The rest had to be 
left to the imagination. 

Fortunately there was an abundance of witch 
hazel ointment along, so that every sufferer was 
able to anoint his hurts. The whole bunch seemed 
to fairly glisten from the time of their arrival at 


284 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 


the boats. Indeed, there never had been such a 
wholesale raid made upon the medical department 
since the Stanhope Troup of Banner Boy Scouts 
was organized. 

But after all was said and done they had come 
out of the whole affair at least with honor. And 
now that the peril was a thing of the past they 
could well afford to laugh at their adventures on 
Cedar Island. 


CHAPTER XXXI 


A scout's duty 

“Seems like a dream; don’t it, Paul?” 

Jack dropped down beside the acting scout mas- 
ter as he made this remark. He had just stepped 
out from the new camp on the mainland, and 
found Paul sitting upon a log, looking across the 
water in the direction they had come. 

The sun was just setting, and a rosy flush filled 
the western heavens. It seemed to fall softly 
upon mysterious Cedar Island, nestling there in 
the midst of the now tranquil waters. 

Paul looked up with a smile, as he made room 
on the log for his chum, who had always been so 
willing to stand by him through thick and thin. 

“Well, do you know. Jack,” he spoke, “that 
was just exactly what seemed to strike me. I was 
staring hard at the island, and wondering if I had 
been asleep and dreamed all those queer happen- 
ings. Fact is, just before you spoke I even pinched 
my leg to see if I was really wide awake.” 

The other laughed at this. 

“ Oh I you’re awake, all right, Paul,” he re- 
285 


286 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


marked. “You seemed to get off without any 
show of damage to your good-looking face. As 
for the rest of us, if ever we begin to think we’ve 
been and dreamed it, we’ve got a remedy better 
than pinching. All we have to do is to bend down 
over a still pool of water and take a look at our 
faces. That’ll convince us in a hurry we did have 
a lively time of it.” 

Paul pointed across the lake to where the island 
lay bathed in that wonderful afterglow that shone 
from the painted heavens. 

“ Did you ever see a prettier sight?” he asked. 
“It looks as peaceful as any picture could be. 
You wouldn’t think a bunch of fellows could run 
up against such a lot of trouble over on such a 
fine little place as Cedar Island; would you, 
now?” 

“I feel the same way you do, Paul; and I’d 
say we never ought to have left it, only after the 
flood it’d be a muddy place, and we wouldn’t take 
any pleasure getting around.” 

“Oh! well,” Paul rejoined cheerfully, “after 
all, perhaps it isn’t our last visit up this way. 
Who knows but what we may have another chance 
to come over here and look around. It was a 
good scheme. I’m thinking, Jack, and we’ll never 
be sorry we came.” 

“ I should say not,” remarked the other, 
quickly; “just turn around and take a look back 


A SCOUT’S DUTY 


287 


into our camp. See where Professor Hackett is 
lying propped up with pillows from the boats. 
Well, suppose we’d never come over this way, 
what d’ye think would have happened to him? 
He says he owes his life to your skill, Paul, and 
that, try as they would, Mr. Jameson and the 
other assistants couldn’t seem to stop the bleed- 
ing. That alone pays us for all we’ve gone 
through, Paul.” 

“ I guess it does,” Paul admitted, readily, “ be- 
cause he’s a smart man, and has done a lot to en- 
tertain the crowds that go to the seashore to rest 
and forget their troubles. But I’m glad none of 
the boys seem to have suffered any serious dam- 
age from the effect of the explosion or that mad 
chase afterwards.” 

Yes, we ought to call ourselves lucky, and let 
it go at that,” Jack remarked. 

“When you think about all that might have 
happened, I tell you we’ve got lots of reason to 
be thankful,” Paul went on, with considerable 
feeling. 

“ Sure we have,” added Jack. “ Instead of that 
stick taking me in the cheek, it might have struck 
my eye and injured my sight for life.” 

“And where I got only a wrench that may 
make me limp a little for a few days, I could have 
broken a leg,” said Paul. 

“That’s one of the rules scouts have to keep 


288 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


in mind, you know,’’ Jack continued; “always be 
cheerful and look on the bright side of things. I 
reckon there never comes a time when you can’t 
find a rainbow of promise if you look far enough. 
Things are never as bad as they might be.” 

“ The boys seem to have settled down here just 
a« if they meant to enjoy the rest of the stay,” 
Paul observed, as he turned his head again, so as 
to look at the bustling camp close by. 

“Yes, and even the very air seems to tell of 
peace and plenty,” said Jack, with a little laugh, 
as he sniffed the appetizing odors that were be- 
ginning to announce that preparations for the 
evening meal had started. 

“You’re right,” agreed Paul, “I guess there’s 
nothing more ‘homey’ than the smell of onions 
frying. I never get a whiff of it on the street of 
a winter evening but what I seem to see some of 
the camps I’ve been in. And then, just think how 
it gets your appetite on edge, till you can hardly 
wait for the cook to call out that supper’s ready. 
But I was thinking of some other things when 
you came up.” 

“ I reckon I could mention one of them,” said 
Jack. 

“ Let’s hear, then,” the other demanded. 

Jack swept his hand down the lake in the direc- 
tion of the outlet. 

“You’re worrying about that,” he said. 


A SCOUT^S DUTY 


289 


‘‘Well, that’s just about the size of it, Jack. 
We know the lake’s gone down to about what it 
was before the storm hit us; but what if a great 
big rock blocks the passage?” 

“You know what Mr. Jameson said you could 
do?” Jack remarked. 

“About the dynamite, to blast an opening big 
enough for our boats to get through? Yes, Jack, 
I suppose that could be done.” 

“And he says he’ll stand by to see that it is 
done,” the other continued. “As Mr. Jameson 
is an expert at all sorts of explosives, you can just 
make up your mind we’ll have no trouble getting 
away. Besides, Paul, I’ve got a feeling that when 
we go down in the morning to take a survey, we’ll 
be more than pleased with the way things look.” 

“Which all sounds good to me,” Paul has- 
tened to declare. “Anyhow, I’m going to believe 
it’s bound to turn out as you say. In spite of our 
troubles we’ve been a pretty lucky lot.” 

“ But you talked as though the getting away 
part of the business was only a part of what you 
had on your mind,” Jack went on. 

“There was something else,” the other scout 
admitted. 

“ Suppose you open up and tell me, Paul ; be- 
cause somehow I don’t seem to be able to get what 
you mean.” 

“ It seems to me,” the patrol leader remarked, 


290 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

seriously, “that while all of us scouts, and the 
professor’s party in the bargain, have been 
shaking hands with each other over the lucky es- 
cape we had, we’ve pretty near forgotten one poor 
chap.” 

Jack gave a start, and then whistled softly. 

“ That’s right, Paul,” he said, “ for I take it 
you mean the crazy islander.” 

“How do we know what happened to him?” 
Paul continued. 

“ But Mr. Jameson seemed to feel sure he 
would take to the hill when the flood came,” Jack 
replied. “And he also told us, you remember, 
that some of their food was at a higher point than 
the water could have reached. So, if the crazy 
man wanders about that camp, there’s no need of 
his going hungry long.” 

“ I guess that’s about so,” Paul agreed, as 
though these words from his chum took away 
some of his anxiety. “ From what they say, it 
seems as if he has come to look on them as 
friends. So, chances are ten to one he’d go to 
their different camps after the flood went down.” 

“Queer how he came to be here,” Jack re- 
marked. 

“Oh, I don’t know,” the other observed; 
“there’s no telling what a crazy person will do. 
His coming to this island must have been with 


A SCOUT’S DUTY 


291 

the hazy notion that any one searching for him 
couldn’t find him here.” 

‘‘Searching for him, Paul?” 

“Well, you remember Mr. Jameson said he 
had an idea the poor fellow must have escaped 
from some institution,” Jack continued. 

“Yes, he did say that; and for all he looks so 
big and fierce, with his long hair and beard, he’s 
harmless. But, Jack, between us now, do you 
think we could go back home when our little vaca- 
tion trip is over and feel that we’d done all our 
duty as true scouts, when that poor chap had been 
left up here — ^perhaps to starve on Cedar Is- 
land?” 

“Whew! You’re the greatest boy I ever saw, 
Paul, to get a grip on a situation and remember 
things.” 

“But — answer my question,” persisted the 
other. 

“Well, what you said must be so,” Jack ac- 
knowledged ; “ and it makes me feel pretty small 
to remember that, while we’ve all been feeling so 
merry over our wonderful escape. I’d forgotten 
all about him** 

“Jack, it’s too late to do anything tonight, you 
know.” 

“ I reckon it is, Paul,” replied the other, look- 
ing a bit anxiously across the water to where the 
glow was commencing to give way to shadows 


292 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


along the wooded shore of Cedar Island; ‘‘but 
if you thought best, Fd be willing to take the lan- 
tern and cross over with you.” 

Paul thrust out his hand impulsively. 

“ Shake on that, old chum,” he exclaimed. 
“Your heart’s as big as a bushel basket, and in 
the right place every time. But on the whole. 
Jack, I don’t believe it would be the wise thing 
for us to do.” 

“Just as you say, Paul; only I wanted you to 
know I was ready to back you up in anything.” 

“We’re both tired, and sore in the bargain,” 
continued the scout master, steadily. 

“Yes,” Jack admitted, unconsciously caressing 
his painful bruises. 

“The island is in a bad state just now, after 
being flooded,” Paul continued. 

“ That’s right, I can jolly well believe it,” his 
chum agreed. 

“And if the wild man hasn’t been drowned, 
he’ll surely be able to look out for himself a while 
longer. Mr. Jameson felt sure he wouldn’t 
starve, with all the food they left behind.” 

“Then it won’t hurt to let it go till tomorrow, 
eh, Paul?” 

“ I had made up my mind that we’d organize 
another party, this time taking some of the fel- 
lows who have been kept in camp, and comb 
Cedar Island from end to end to find that man.” 


A SCOUT’S DUTY 


393 

“A good plan, Paul,” said the other scout; 
“but do you think he’ll make friends with us, 
even when we find him?” 

“Mr. Jameson says he understands the peace 
sign,” the scout master continued, “ and must 
really have had a bright mind at some time. He 
told me he had an idea the man may have met 
with some injury that had unsettled his reason. 
He seemed to be greatly interested in all they 
were doing, and several times even made sugges- 
tions that startled the professor.” 

“I remember that much, too,” said Jack, “ and 
Mr. Jameson also said he meant to try and learn 
if anybody knew about a John Pennington. That 
was the name the man spoke once in his rambling 
talk.” 

“Well, perhaps we may be able in some way 
to do the poor fellow a good turn. Jack. I hope 
so, anyhow. My I how those boys are trying to 
beat the record at getting up a grand supper. 
Seems to me my appetite is growing at the rate of 
a mile a minute.” 

“ If it keeps on that way, good-bye to our stock 
of provisions,” laughed Jack; “but, to tell the 
truth, I feel pretty much the same. The most 
welcome sound I could hear right now would be 
Bluff calling everybody to get a share of that fine 
mess.” 

“ Then you won’t have to wait long, I guess,” 


294 the banner boy SCOUTS AFLOAT 

his chum declared, “ because from all the signs of 
dishing out I imagine they’re about ready right 
now.” 

Paul proved a true prophet, for immediately 
Bluff began to ding-dong upon a sheet iron frying 
pan, using a big spoon to produce a discord that, 
in the ears of the hungry boys, was the sweetest 
music in the world. 

Gathering around, the scouts made a merry 
group as they proceeded to demolish the stacks of 
savory food that had been heaped upon their tin 
plates; and drink to each other’s health in the 
fragrant coffee that steamed in the generous cups, 
also of tin, belonging to their mess chest. 

After supper the scouts sat around, and while 
seme of them worked at various things in which 
they were particularly interested, such as develop- 
ing the films that would give a dozen views of 
the great flood, others sang songs or listened to 
Mr. Jameson tell strange stories. 

The man had been to the corners of the world 
during a busy lifetime, often with scientific parties 
sent out by societies interested in geography, nat- 
ural history or astronomy. And hence it had 
fallen to the lot of Mr. Jameson to experience, 
some remarkable adventures. The boys felt that 
he was the most Interesting talker they had ever 
met. 

After several hours had slipped by, some of 


A SCOUT’S DUTY 


295 

the scouts, notably those who had been among 
the bold explorers’ band, were discovered to be 
nodding drowsily. Indeed, Andy and Tom Betts 
had gone sound asleep, just as they lay curled up 
before the fire. The warmth of the blaze, to- 
gether with the unusual exertions of the day, had 
been too much for the boys. 

And so the bugler was told to sound “ taps ” 
to signify that it v/as time they crawled under 
their blankets. 

A few chose to sleep aboard the motor boats, 
which, of course, relieved the tents from over- 
crowding. Professor Hackett and his assistants 
had been lodged in one of the tents, which fact 
had something to do with the lack of room. 

But presently all these things had been ar- 
ranged. Paul himself intended to pass the night 
in the open. He declared he would really enjoy 
the experience ; and two others insisted on keeping 
him company^ — ^little Nuthin and Bobolink. 

So Paul, who knew a lot about these things, 
showed them just how to wrap themselves up like 
mummies in their blankets, and then lie with their 
feet to the fire. He said old hunters and cowboys 
always slept that way when camping in the open. 


CHAPTER XXXII 


CONCLUSION 

Paul was awakened by feeling something 
nudging him in the ribs. It was Bobolink’s el- 
bow; and, thinking at first that it might be an 
accident, the scout master made no move. 

But again he received a severe jolt. And at 
the same time came a whisper close in his ear: 

“Paul! Are you awake?” Bobolink was say- 
ing, so low that any one six feet away could not 
have heard his voice. 

“What ails you?” asked Paul. 

He might have imagined that the other had 
been taken ill, from over feeding, perhaps, and 
wanted Paul, as the doctor of the troop, to give 
him some medicine. But on second thought Paul 
realized that there was too much mystery about 
the action of Bobolink to admit of such an expla- 
nation. 

“Listen, Paul,” the other went on, still whis- 
pering, “ there’s some sort of wild beast goin’ to 
raid the camp 1 ” 

“What’s that?” asked the scout master, a little 
296 


CONCLUSION 


297 


sternly, for, knowing the weakness of Bobolink 
in the line of practical joking, he suspected that 
the other might be up to some of his old tricks. 

And Bobolink must have detected an air of 
doubt in the manner in which Paul spoke those 
two words, for he immediately resumed: 

“ Honest Injun, Paul, I ain’t foolin’ ! Say, do 
they have panthers around here? Because that’s 
what I think it must be.” 

“Where’d you see it?” 

As Paul put this question he was working his 
arms free from the folds of his blanket. When 
he lay down, more through force of habit than 
because he thought there would be any need of 
such a thing, Paul had placed his shotgun on the 
ground beside him. And no sooner was his right 
hand at liberty than, groping around, he took pos- 
session of it. 

“ Up in that big oak tree,” Bobolink went on. 
“You watch where that limb hangs out over the 
camp and you’ll see somethin’ move; or I’ve been 
dreamin’, that’s all.” 

Paul did not have to twist his head very far 
around in order to see the spot in question. He 
watched it as the seconds began to troop along, 
until almost a fell minute had gone. 

And Paul was just about to believe Bobolink 
must have been dreaming, when he, too, saw the 
bunch of leaves violently agitated. 


298 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


Undoubtedly some tree-climbing animal was up 
there. Paul felt a thrill pass through him. Un- 
consciously, perhaps, his fingers tightened their 
grip upon the shotgun, which was apt to prove a 
tower of strength in case the worst that could 
happen came to pass. 

Straining his eyes, as he partly lifted his head, 
Paul believed he could just make out a shadowy 
form stretched upon the large oak limb. 

He was more than puzzled. 

Wild animals were not altogether unknown 
within the twenty-mile limit around Stanhope. A 
bear might be seen occasionally — or at least the 
tracks of one, for the timid beast knew enough to 
hide in the daytime in one of the numerous 
swamps. 

But this did not seem large enough for a bear, 
which would have surely made a more bulky ob- 
ject clinging to the limb. Moreover, bears were 
not reckoned bold, and no hunter had ever known 
one to come spying around a camp. As soon as 
the trail of human beings is run across by a bear, 
the animal always takes the alarm and hastens 
to its den, to lie low until the danger has passed. 

But Bobolink had mentioned the magic word 
“panther,” and this caused the other aroused 
scout to look more closely at the dimly seen ob- 
ject. Sure enough it did seem to be flattened out 


CONCLUSION 


299 


on the limb, much as Paul imagined a big cat 
might lie. 

“What’d we better do about it, Paul — give a 
yell and jump up?” Bobolink asked, his voice 
quivering, perhaps with excitement, or it might 
be under stress of alarm; for it was not the 
nicest thing in the world to be lying there help- 
less with a hungry panther crouching above. 

“Wait, and let’s make sure,” replied the care- 
ful Paul. 

Some impetuous boys would have thought, the 
very first thing, of bringing that double-barrelled 
gun to bear on the dark, shadowy figure, and cut- 
ting loose, perhaps even firing both charges at once. 

At such close range, less than thirty feet, a shell 
containing even bird shot is apt to be projected 
with all the destructive qualities of a large bullet- 
Paul knew all about this, and also had faith in 
the hard-hitting qualities of his long tested gun; 
but he was not the one to be tempted into any rash 
action. 

“Be sure you’re right; then go ahead,” was a 
motto which Paul always tried to practice. He 
had certainly found it worth while on more than 
one occasion in the past, and It was likely to serve 
him well now. 

And so he waited, ready for a sudden emer- 
gency, but not allowing himself to be hurried. 

He soon had reason to feel very thankful that 


300 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


his good sense had prevailed, for presently the 
leaves were again set to shaking and, as they 
parted, Paul saw something that gave him a 
shock. 

“Oh! what d’ye think of that, now? It’s the 
wild man of Cedar Island!” gasped Bobolink, 
actually sitting up in his excitement. 

And Paul had already made certain of this 
fact as soon as his eyes fell upon the hairy face 
seen among the branches. The shudder that 
passed through his frame had nothing to do with 
fear. Paul was only horrified to realize what 
might have happened had he taken Bobolink’s 
suggestion for the truth, and fully believed the 
figure in the oak to be a savage panther. 

“We’d better let Mr. Jameson know,” Paul 
remarked, as he also sat up and cleared his legs 
of the blanket. 

“Yes, he’ll know how to get him down. I bet 
you, Paul, the feller went and swam across from 
the island. But how would he guess we were 
here?” 

“Oh! he could see the boats in the day time; 
and don’t forget we’ve had a fire burning all 
night, so far,” said the scout master. 

When Mr. Jameson came out of the tent, in 
answer to Paul’s low summons, and learned what 
had happened, he readily agreed to influence the 
wild man to come down. The poor fellow had 


CONCLUSION 


301 


learned to look on Mr. Jameson as a friend, and, 
realizing that he had abandoned the island, doubt- 
less it was his desire to see him again that had in- 
duced this visit. 

He proved to be harmless, and upon being 
given food ate ravenously. Later on it was dis- 
covered that he had launched a log and made 
his way to the mainland by means of this crude 
craft, with a branch for a paddle. 

Mr. Jameson declared that he would take the 
stranger to Stanhope when the vehicle came for 
the professor, and do all in his power to learn 
just who he was, as well as get him safely back 
among his friends. 

To dispose of the wild man of Cedar Island 
once and for all, it might be said right here that 
Mr. Jameson kept his word. The name John 
Pennington served as a clue, and in the end he 
learned that was his name. He had lost his mind 
through an accident and, though his case was 
deemed hopeless, occasionally he was apt to have 
little flashes of his former cleverness. He was 
returned to the sanitarium from which he had 
escaped, and the boys never heard of him again. 
But the memory of the wild man would always 
be associated with Cedar Island. 

On the following day Paul and Jack managed 
to get around to the outlet, for the scout master 
was anxious to learn what the chances of their 


302 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 


leaving the lake, when they were ready, might be. 

They found that, just as had been believecL 
that shoulder of rock and earth had been shaken 
loose by the tremor of the earth at the time of 
the big shock, when the professor was experi- 
menting with some new explosive. 

In falling, it had indeed dammed the outlet, 
and the storm coming so soon after, of course the 
water in the lake had risen at a frightful rate. 
In the end the obstruction had commenced to dis- 
appear; but luckily for all concerned, it had held 
fairly well until much of the water had escaped, 
when finally it had given way. 

The channel was as good as ever; indeed, Paul 
seemed to think that it offered fewer impediments 
to a passage now than before all this had hap- 
pened. 

That eased the minds of the scouts, and they 
could go back again to their camp with good 
news for the others. 

A carriage came that day for the professor, 
and his assistants managed to carry him across 
country to the road; just as they had undoubtedly 
done the two big boxes of material that came from 
Mr. Stormways’ mill that other day. 

He shook hands with each and every scout 
before leaving, and promised to remember them 
always for what they had done. When he came 


CONCLUSION 


303 

to Paul, he clung to his hand, and there were tears 
in the eyes of the little professor as he said: 

“ I honestly believe that you saved my life, my 
boy, and I trust that through your ability I may 
be spared a few more years. And depend on it. 
Pm never going to let you get out of touch with 
me, Paul Morrison. I hope to live to see you a 
great surgeon, some day.” 

The scouts filled out the balance of their vaca- 
tion at the lake, and considered that they had had 
some of the strangest experiences that could hap- 
pen to a group of boys ; but although at the time 
they could not suspect it, there were still more 
Interesting things In store for Paul and his com- 
rades of Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts. What 
these were, you will find related in the next vol- 
ume of this series, to be called, “The Banner 
Boy Scouts Snowbound; Or, A Tour on Skates 
and Iceboats.” 

When the time came for them to start back, 
it was with more or less anxiety that they came 
to the canal connecting the waters of the two 
rivers flowing parallel for a few miles, and only 
a short distance apart. 

But they need not have borrowed trouble, for 
the Bushkill was still higher than usual at this 
season of the year and all through the disused 
canal they found plenty of water, so that neither 
of the boats stuck In the mud. 


304 THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT 

In good time, then, the Banner Boy Scouts ar- 
rived home, to thrill the lads who had not been 
fortunate enough to accompany them on their trip 
afloat, with wonderful accounts of all the remark- 
able things which had happened to them while in 
camp on Cedar Island. 


THE END 





••I 


4 


% 

m 


f 


% 




t* 

A. » 


< I 


• . *1 

^ % 


; 


f ‘ 




' / 
< 



I , 

( 



< 


■A ■ 


^ , . • ; \ 




UBRARY OF CONGRESS 



